Latest revision as of 13:25, 11 October 2024

[edit] About Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS is a powerful module which allows you to automatically provision virtual servers to your clients.

Your customers will be able to manage virtual servers, backups, firewall, as well as access noVNC, SPICE, or Xterm.js console, and much more - all this directly in your WHMCS.
Additionally, the module provides support for Cloud-Init for the KVM virtualization type, and lets you conveniently control all existing servers, IP addresses and clusters through the built-in Proxmox Addon.

ModulesGarden is official Proxmox Solution Partner and this module is recommended by Proxmox Server Solutions GmbH.

Admin Area Features:

✔ Create/Suspend/Unsuspend/Terminate Server

✔ Create/Terminate User Account

✔ Change Package - Supports Configurable Options

✔ Reconfigure Server Network

✔ Boot/Reboot/Stop/Shutdown Server

✔ Change User Role

✔ Access noVNC, SPICE And Xterm.js Console

✔ Migrate Server Between Nodes In The Same Cluster

✔ Reinstall Server

✔ Change Server Hostname, ISO Image, Boot Devices And SSH Public Key

✔ View Server Status, Details And Statistics

✔ View Graphs - With Option To Change Time Scale of MRTG Graphs

✔ Display Disk And Bandwidth Usage Of Each Product

✔ Display CPU And Memory Usage Of Each Product

✔ Display IP Sets (KVM)

✔ Auto Node - Automatically Create VM On Node With Most Free Space

✔ Configure Client Area Features Per Product

✔ Configure Network And Private Network Settings With SDN Support

✔ Import IP Address To Hosting IP Addresses Table

✔ Return IP Address To IP Addresses Subnet

✔ Add Additional IP Address To VM

✔ Add Additional Disks Storage To VM (KVM)

✔ Enable Qemu Guest Agent (KVM)

✔ Enable Backups Routing

✔ Enable Auto VM Backups Before Reinstallation

✔ Enable Load Balancer

✔ Receive Notifications About VM Upgrades And Creation Failures

Proxmox Addon Features:

✔ Display Servers:

✔ List Per VPS And Cloud

✔ Clusters List

✔ VMs List

✔ KVM Templates

✔ Recovery VM Configurations List With Export To Backup File

✔ Task History

✔ Statuses, Resources Usage, IP Assignments And Details

✔ Manage Public And Private IP Addresses Per Server/VLAN/Tag/Node/Bridge:

✔ IPv4 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Subnets

✔ View Logs Of IP Assignment Changes

✔ VM Cleaner - Manage VM Not Existing In Your WHMCS

✔ Convert KVM VPS To KVM Template

✔ Define VM IDs Ranges Per Server

✔ Set Minimum VM ID For Product Without ID Ranges Defined

✔ Provide Server Credentials For Cloud-Init Scripts

✔ Configure Scheduled Backups, Firewall And Operating Systems Templates

✔ Configure Resource Weights For Load Balancer Prioritization

✔ Configure Tasks Repetition Threshold And Email Notifications

✔ Configure Console Proxy

✔ Synchronize Users Permissions

✔ Create And Manage Custom Cloud-Init Scripts

Proxmox VE Widget

✔ View Faulty VM Deployments

✔ View Failed Tasks

✔ View Cluster Remaining Resources

✔ View Node Resources

Client Area Features:

✔ View Server Status, Details And Statistics

✔ Boot/Reboot/Stop/Shut Down Server

✔ Reconfigure Server Network

✔ Access noVNC, SPICE And Xterm.js Console

✔ Change Server Hostname, ISO Image, Boot Devices And SSH Public Key

✔ View And Edit Public SSH Key (KVM)

✔ Download Public And Private SSH Keys (LXC)

✔ Create/Restore/Delete Backups Of Current Server

✔ Manage Backups Within Defined Limits (Max Number And Size Of Files)

✔ Restore Backups From:

✔ Any Owned Server

✔ Proxmox Backup Server (PBS)

✔ Restore Backups Of:

✔ Selected Single Files And Directories With Option To Download Them (PBS)

✔ Full Server Backups

✔ Manage Backup Schedules Within Defined Limits (Max Number And Size Of Files)

✔ Protect Selected Backups From Manual Deletion And Backups Routing

✔ Add And Manage Additional Disks

✔ Manage Firewall Rules And Options

✔ View Resources Usage Graphs - With Option To Change Time Scale of MRTG Graphs:

✔ CPU

✔ Memory

✔ Network Traffic

✔ Disk I/O

✔ View Network Devices, Manage Private Interface And Attach Servers

✔ Reinstall Server Using Templates (KVM) And ISO Images

✔ Send Email Notifications When Server Exceeds Resources Thresholds:

✔ Network Traffic

✔ CPU Usage

✔ Memory Usage

✔ Disk Read And Write Speed

✔ Create Server Snapshots:

✔ Manually

✔ Automatically:

✔ Every Number Of Hours

✔ Each Specified Days

✔ View Tasks History

✔ Manage VM Power Tasks To Automatically Start/Stop/Reboot Server At Specified Time

✔ Display CPU, Memory, Disk And Bandwidth Usage

✔ Choose Server Resources While Ordering And Upgrade/Downgrade Them Freely

Configurable Options:

✔ KVM:

✔ Number Of CPU Sockets

✔ Number Of Cores Per Socket

✔ CPU Limit

✔ CPU Units For The VM

✔ Amount of RAM

✔ Disk Space

✔ Additional Disk Space (With Configurable Storage, Units And Size):

✔ IPv4 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Subnets

✔ Private Network

✔ Backups Size Limit

✔ Backups Files Limit

✔ Snapshots Limit

✔ Snapshot Jobs

✔ Bandwidth Limit

✔ VM Template

✔ Archive

✔ Network Rate

✔ VCPUs

✔ ISO Image

✔ OS Type

✔ Custom Cloud-Init Configuration

✔ Cloud-Init Script

✔ Tag

✔ LXC:

✔ Number Of CPU Cores

✔ CPU Limit

✔ CPU Units For The VM

✔ Amount of RAM

✔ Amount of SWAP

✔ Disk Space

✔ Additional Disk Space (With Configurable Storage, Units And Size):

✔ IPv4 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Addresses

✔ IPv6 Subnets

✔ Private Network

✔ Backups Size Limit

✔ Backups Files Limit

✔ Snapshots Limit

✔ Snapshot Jobs

✔ Bandwidth Limit

✔ VM Template

✔ Archive

✔ Network Rate

✔ Tag

General Info:

✔ Supports Cloud-Init (KVM)

✔ Supports PVE And PAM Authentication

✔ Supports KVM And LXC Virtualization

✔ Supports Proxy For Proxmox Console Connections

✔ Integrated With Advanced Billing For WHMCS - Actual Server Resource Usage Billing

✔ Integrated With IP Manager For WHMCS - Complete Control And Easy Assignment Of IP Subnets (LXC)

✔ Integrated With Products Reseller For WHMCS - End-To-End Solution For Products And Servers Reselling

✔ Integrated With Proxmox VE Cloud VPS For WHMCS - Multiple Servers Provisioning And Management Within Set Resource Limits

✔ Integrated With Server Allocator For WHMCS - Automatic Assignment Of Most Suitable Servers To Products

✔ Fully Integrated With Lagom WHMCS Client Theme

✔ Multi-Language Support

✔ Supports Proxmox VE 6.X, 7.X And 8.X

✔ Supports IPv4 And IPv6

✔ Supports PHP 8.2 Back To PHP 7.4

✔ Supports WHMCS Themes "Six" And "Twenty-One"

✔ Supports WHMCS V8.11 Back To WHMCS V8.8

✔ Requires ionCube Loader V13 Or Later

✔ Easy Module Upgrade To Open Source Version

[edit] Installation and Configuration

This tutorial will show you how to successfully install and configure Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS.

We will guide you step by step through the whole installation and configuration process.

Note: If you are still using any of the module's previous versions prior to v2.7.0, follow these instructions.

[edit] Installation

This tutorial will show you how to successfully install and configure Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS.

We will guide you step by step through the whole installation and configuration process.

1. Log in to our client area and download the module.

2. Extract the package and upload the 'includes' and 'modules' folders into the main WHMCS directory.

The content of the package to upload should look like this.

Warning: The next step is important, make sure you do not skip it!

3. Open 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' and upload the content of the proper version on all Proxmox Virtual Environment servers into the '/' path.
You should upload these files not only during the first installation of the module but also each time you update it.

Note 1: If the version of the Proxmox server you are using is not available, choose the package with the highest version number that is lower than the one you are currently using.
Note 2: If you wish to allow noVNC consoles, you need to configure a product using the PVE realm and set user permissions to 'PVEVMUser.'
Important: Open Folder UploadOnProxmoxServer/5.2-10 and upload content on all your proxmox servers. Scripts must be updated on proxmox server v2.6.0 to allow Xterm.js console work.

4. When you install Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS for the first time, you have to rename the 'license_RENAME.php' file.

The file is located in 'modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/license_RENAME.php'. Rename it from 'license_RENAME.php' to 'license.php'.

5. In order to configure your license key, you have to edit the previously renamed 'license.php' file.

Enter your license key between the quotation marks as presented on the following screen.
You can find your license key in our client area → 'My Products'.

6. In the next step, set up the 'storage' folder as recursively writable.

This folder is available at two locations:

your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/
your_whmcs/modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/

Important: Beta to Stable Release update:

7. If you are upgrading your module from beta to a stable release module version please either:

delete the "ProxmoxAddon_Backups" table from the database manually, then deactivate and activate the module in 'Addon Modules'
enter the below command in phpMyAdmin:

ALTER TABLE `ProxmoxAddon_Backups` ADD `format` VARCHAR(40) NOT NULL AFTER `volid`;

[edit] Activation of Proxmox Addon

9. Firstly, activate the Proxmox Addon.

To do so, log in to your WHMCS and navigate to 'System Settings' → 'Addon Modules'. Find 'Proxmox Addon' and press 'Activate'.

Note: The Proxmox addon version might not match the current version of the provisioning module itself. This is completely normal due to the specific structure of the module.

10. In the next step, you need to permit access to this module.

To do so, click on the 'Configure' button, tick 'Full Administrator' and press 'Save Changes'.

[edit] Configuration of Server

11. Now, we will show you how to configure a new product.

Go to 'System Settings' → 'Servers' and press the 'Add New Server' button.

12. Next, enter your server name and IP address, you may add any port in the following format: "IpAddress:Port" , that is: 10.10.10.1:8006.

Enter the and password, choose the authentication type from 'Authentication' and 'Proxmox VE VPS' from the 'Type' dropdown menus. Save changes afterward.

Important: If you have problems with connection, make sure the WHMCS server can correctly connect to Proxmox. For more details refer to this article [1].

13. Time to create a server group. To do so, click on 'Create Server Group'.

14. Enter the name, click on your previously created server, press 'Add' and afterward 'Save Changes'.

[edit] Configuration of Product

15. In order to create and configure a product, go to 'System Settings' → 'Products/Services' .

Click on 'Create a New Group'.

16. Enter a product group name and press 'Save Changes'.

17. When you have a product group, you can assign your product to it.

To create a product, click on 'Create a New Product'.

18. Afterward, choose your product group from dropdown menus and point its type, enter your product name and choose Proxmox VE VPS as a module name.
Press 'Continue'.

'Product Type' can be set to 'Server/VPS' but nameservers will need to be added later (here you can find instructions on how to remove them from your order template).
'Server/VPS' type can also be useful for a more complex display of IP addresses assignment. However, if this is not something you need, you can select 'Shared Hosting' .

19. Now, go to the 'Module Settings' section and choose your previously created server group from the dropdown menu.

The page should reload automatically after the selection. If it doesn't, you may need to click 'Save Changes' .

20. Choose 'Virtualization Type' and 'Default Node' from the dropdown menus, and define whether the available resources should be checked before creating a new machine.

Available virtualization types:

KVM - short form for Kernel-based virtual machines; used for Qemu (Quick Emulator) which is an open source hypervisor that emulates a physical computer
LXC - used for Linux Container as a lightweight alternative to fully virtualized virtual machines

Remember that changing the node will always result in the replacement of the current configuration with the default one. Upon selecting the node, the current configuration should be saved automatically.
If, for any reason, this does not happen, please press 'Save Changes'.

Note: If you choose the 'Auto-Node' as your 'Default Node', new virtual servers will be created on the least used node.
Note 2: An advanced tool is available for you to automatically manage the node selection with the best amount of resources. Read more about Load Balancer.

[edit] KVM Virtualization Type

21. Setting the KVM virtualization type.

Before you start configuring the KVM virtualization, we highly recommend that you familiarize yourself with the following 'Qemu/KVM Virtual Machines' Proxmox Virtual Environment wiki article.

Since the 2.7.0 module version, the basic fields required to create a virtual machine are filled in by default to make the initial setup simpler for you.
Additionally, only the fields that require the administrator's initial attention are expanded by default, while all panel sections with advanced settings are collapsed.

Start your product configuration in the 'Virtual Machine Configuration' panel, where you can set up such features as the used OS Template or Archive, machine resources and limits or assigned IP addresses.
Note that some fields can be left empty if you want to disable them or set as unlimited - read the tooltips for further guidance.

Note: When creating a virtual machine (VM) from an OS template, the module automatically deletes network interfaces and creates new ones based on the product configuration.
Note 1: If you want to create the VM based on 'Archive' of the backup copy, remember to leave the 'OS Template' field empty.
Note 2: To turn off loading archives, see section: Tips, point 26.

Next, configure 'Network', 'Hard Disk', 'Backup' and so on. For KVM virtualization type, there is also the 'Guest Agent' section available.

Guest Agent is used to exchange information between the virtualization server and the operating system of your virtual machine.
Thanks to this, additional commands such as setting IP addresses and the user’s password can be executed in the guest system.
The 'Service Password', 'Service Hostname' and 'Configure Network' options work with Windows OS only.
If enabled, while creating a VM, the Guest Agent will set up the user’s hostname and password and configure the network automatically.

'Guest Trim ' - enable and the guest-trim will be run after moving the disk or migrating the VM
'FileSystems Freeze during Backup' - enable to allow freezing/thawing of guest filesystems during backup for consistency

Remember that you need to install Guest Agent on your KVM template in order for the function to work properly. For more info click here

Other panels that are less important or require more knowledge can be expanded according to your needs by clicking on the arrow on the right.

Finally, choose which client area features shall be available in the client area. Enable the 'Managed View' feature to make all virtual machine management options and actions visible to the administrator and hidden from the client.
Do not forget to check out the Finalizing The Configuration chapter.
Other practical information on the product configuration can be also found in the further sections of this documentation.

Save settings when ready.

Important: Keep in mind that the root password is by default generated automatically for the KVM virtualization upon its creation and reset.

If you want to set your own password on the KVM virtualization, use the Cloud-Init feature.

[edit] LXC Virtualization Type

22. Setting the LXC virtualization type is very similar to KVM.

Before you start configuring the LXC virtualization, we highly recommend that you familiarize yourself with the following 'Linux Container' Proxmox wiki article.

Just as with KVM, the basic fields required to create a virtual machine are filled in by default since the 2.7.0 module version to make the initial setup simpler for you.
Additionally, only the fields that require the administrator's initial attention are expanded by default, while all panel sections with advanced settings are collapsed.

Start your product configuration in the 'Virtual Machine Configuration' panel, where you can set up such features as 'Default Storage', used 'OS Template' or 'Archive', container resources and limits or the number of assigned IP addresses.
Note that some fields can be left empty if you want to disable them or set as unlimited - read the tooltips for more information.

Note: If you want to create the VM based on 'Archive' of the backup copy, remember to leave the 'OS Template' field empty.

Next, configure 'Mount Point', 'Backup', 'Network' and so on.

Other panels that are less important or require more knowledge can be expanded according to your needs by clicking on the arrow on the right.

Finally, choose which client area features will be available in the client area. Enable the 'Managed View' feature to make all virtual machine management options and actions visible to the administrator and hidden from the client.
Do not forget to check out the Finalizing The Configuration chapter.
Other practical information on the product configuration can be also found in the further sections of this documentation.

Save settings when ready.

Important: The LXC virtualization type is supported only by Proxmox VE 4.0. and later.
If you use any previous version of a Proxmox server, you will not be able to start this virtualization.

[edit] Finalizing The Configuration

23. Afterward, you can create configurable options.

This step is optional - if you want to take it, start by selecting which of the configurable options listed in this table you want to generate.

Note: It is advisable not to generate options that you do not plan to use, or in case you want their fixed values to be taken from the module settings, rather than being flexible.
Moreover, the configurable options differ between the KVM and LXC virtualization types, so create them separately if needed.

Note 2: There is also an 'Alternative Mode' available, which changes the way the configurable options values are verified and calculated.
Select single configurable options and their values will be summed with the default product configuration values instead of overwriting them.

More information about configurable options and their edition can be found here.

24. At the end of the product configuration, you have to add a cron job as shown below (5-minute intervals are recommended).

php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php queue

Do not forget to replace 'your_whmcs' with your WHMCS root location. The cron can be also executed every single minute in order to perform the action more often.
In the Configuration of Addon settings, you will find a personalized command for the cron on your server as well as more possible crons to set up for execution.

You have just finished the installation and configuration of the product, congratulations! Be sure to follow the below addon configuration as well to learn how to set up additional features.

[edit] Configuration of Addon

25. Proceed to 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Settings' → 'General Settings' and set up cron jobs listed under the 'Cron' section.

Please note there are separate cron jobs dedicated to Proxmox VPS and Proxmox Cloud VPS, crucial for the seamless operation of the modules. Their suggested frequency is 5 minutes.
If you use only one of the Proxmox products, there is no need to set up separate cron jobs.
The other cron jobs are responsible for:

Backups synchronization (every 5 minutes suggested) Important: required since version 3.7.0!
Users synchronization (run once only)
VM recovery synchronization (every 5 minutes suggested)
VM migration synchronization (every 5 minutes suggested)
Tasks synchronization (every 5 minutes suggested)
VM power tasks (optional, each 5 minutes suggested)
Resource notifications (optional, each 5 minutes suggested)
Updating the server usage (each 5 minutes suggested)
Removing backups (each 24 hours suggested)
Scheduled backups (optional, each 5 minutes suggested)
Backup tasks migration to scheduled backups (optional, run only once per product)
You can find information on how to run this cron in the Backup Schedules section.
Snapshot jobs (optional, each 5 minutes suggested)
Removing snapshots (optional, each 24 hours suggested)
VM names synchronization (run only once)

26. Next, find the 'Minimum VMID' field under the 'Cron' settings.
Fill it in with a number that will be used as an ID of the first VM, the second VM will be assigned the next ID number.
Define the limit of tasks that will be executed with a single cron run, just type in the required number into the 'Tasks Limit' field.

Here, you may also turn on the 'Debug Mode' if you need to register module logs.

27. Adding a new IP address (applicable only if you do not use IP Manager For WHMCS).

In order to create a new product with an IP address assigned, you have to add 'Dedicated IP ' to the 'IP Addresses' list in 'Proxmox' addon module.
To do so, go to 'IP Management' and press 'New IP Addresses'.
Note: You can add IPv4, IPv6 addresses and IPv6 subnets. The process is the same for all types.

28. Start with defining the IP address type, choose among: 'IPv4', IPv6' and 'IPv6 subnet'.

Then, depending on the selected type, provide:

For IPv4 and IPv6 addresses types

"Network Address" (eg: 192.168.1.0/24)
"Gateway"
"First IP Address" and "Last IP Address" - define the border from which and up to which of the IP address the generation (including the provided addresses)

For "IPv6 Subnet" address type

"Network Address" (eg: 2a00:1911:5::/64)
"Gateway"
'Number of Subnets"
"CIDR"
"First IP Address" and "Last IP Address" - define the border from which and up to which of the IP address the generation (including the provided addresses)

Decide whether the created addresses will be private or not.

Move to the 'Details' tab. Choose a server from the 'Server' dropdown menu and define which virtualization it should be applied to through selecting it from the 'Virtualization' dropdown menu.

Remember to press the 'Confirm' button when ready.

29. You are now able to create a new product using the previously added IP address.

If you are using the KVM virtualization type, the client area with a successfully created product should look similar to the one on the screen below.
The assigned IP addresses should be displayed on the bottom panel according to the way you configured the IP pools. It looks quite similar in the case of the LXC virtualization type product.

[edit] Proxy Installation For Console Connection

A comprehensive guide detailing the installation, update instructions, and operational flow for the Proxmox Proxy application can be found in a dedicated article accessible through the following link.

We encourage you to refer to it for further insight into the Proxmox Proxy application.

The proxy feature can be looked on as an added security boost for your infrastructure.

It hides your Proxmox server so that your clients will not get to know its actual address when connecting to the server via the console in your system.
To work properly, the proxy must be accessible from both the public and private net as clients connect with the proxy from the public net, without the need to connect directly to proxmox.

Proxy must be connected with Proxomx server. To verify if the connection between these two is successful, you may run the following command:

 curl -v https://10.10.11.48:8006

where 10.10.11.48:8006 is the node IP address.

Before you begin the process of connecting the console to the server through a proxy, you need to download the proxy application file.

The file can be found under the following link after you have logged in to your ModulesGarden account.

1. Create a new VPS server, which you may run on a Proxmox server.

It is advised to use the KVM virtualization type.

Warning! The used VPS may NOT have any services running, such as: PHP, WebServer (e.g. apache, nginx) or MySQL server.

2. Configure the network on the virtual machine, make sure the network works correctly, to do so you may use the below command:

ping modulesgarden.com

If everything is fine, assure that basic server security settings have been established.
You may turn off login with a password and turn on login with a key, change the SSH port, set up firewalls etc.

3. Log into the machine on which you are going to set up proxy.

4. Install the docker engine and the docker compose:

https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/
https://docs.docker.com/compose/install/

5. Upload the application files into a proper directory, eg: /root/proxmox-proxy (create if needed).

Then unzip the files.

6. Move to the following catalog:

cd /root/proxmox-proxy

Note that the exact directory depends on the previous step where you uploaded the files.

7. Purchase or generate your own SSL certificate, and then use the certificate to overwrite the following files: 'nginx/localhost.crt' and 'nginx/localhost.key' .

8. Find the 'example.env' file and rename it to '.env'.

Then open the just renamed '.env' file and provide a random set of signs to create the database and root passwords: DB_PASSWORD and MYSQL_ROOT_PASSWORD
These data will be automatically used when creating the database.

9. Run the below command:

docker-compose up --build -d

10. Move to docker container:

docker exec -it proxyphp bash

and run the installation script:

php -q /var/www/html/installer.php install

When ready, find the API Key and keep it safe, you will need it later on when pasting the data into the Proxmox Addon, see point 12 for details.

11. Next, copy your machine IP address to WHMCS. You may check the IP address using the below command:

ip a

Note: Remember to check the IP address in your virtual machine, not in the proxyphp container.

12. Configure all the required data in the Proxomox addon in your WHMCS.

Move to 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Settings'. At the bottom you will find section 'Console Proxy' with 'Host' and 'API Key' fields.
Note that the Host field may include either an IP address or a domain. It is extremely important that you paste here the same data as the ones used in the SSL certificate.
The below screen shows an example with an IP address which is not the only correct possible option here.

Provide the necessary data and confirm the changes.

13. Make sure the server works. In order to do so, please open the address: https://{vmip}:8443.

Remember to replace {vmip} with a valid virtual machine IP address, for example: https://192.168.8.113:8443/
When you see {"errors":["Invalid API Endpoint"]} it means that the server correctly responds.

14. Finally, try to open the noVNC console on your WHMCS Proxmox product to check if the proxy configuration is working properly.

Important: If your certificate expires in the meantime, you will need to buy/generate a new one and follow the below steps:

move to the '/root/proxmox-proxy catalog (the directory may differ depending on your setup)
replace the nginx/localhost.crt and nginx/localhost.key files
run the following command:

docker-compose up --build -d

Note: If you ever encounter an iconcube error while rerunning the 'docker-compose up' command, delete all local docker images related to your docker file using the following command and try again.

$ docker rmi -f $(docker images -a -q)

For instruction on how to react in case an update is required, please refer to the dedicated article including all details on the Proxmox Proxy application.

[edit] Cloud-Init (KVM)

Use Cloud-Init to configure the system during installation, first boot and package change. Cloud-Init was originally developed to provide early initialization of cloud instances.
Click here to learn more about the initial Cloud-Init configuration.

Note: Cloud-Init functionality is supported for the KVM virtualization only.

[edit] Custom Configuration In Addon

[edit] Cloud-Init Scripts

The Cloud-Init Scripts section allows adding ready scripts that will be available to choose from in the products' configuration page.
The selected there script will be used while crating the virtual machine.

Press 'Add New' to manually add your script.

Name your new Cloud-Init script and type in or paste a ready configuration. The configuration must include:

Username
Hostname
Password

Here is an exemplary configuration of a Cloud-Init script. You may alter it to fit your settings and paste into the 'Script' field:

#cloud-config
hostname: {$domain}
manage_etc_hosts: true
fqdn: {$domain}
user: {$username}
password: {$passwordHash}
chpasswd:
  expire: False
users:
  - default
package_upgrade: true

A full list of available variables related to a Proxmox VPS type of the product/service:

{$userid} {$serviceid} {$domain} {$username} {$password} {$passwordHash} {$cipasswordHash} {$model->dedicatedip} {$model->assignedips} {$customfields.sshkeys} {$ipv4Addresses} {$ipv6Addresses}

Where:

$model variables - stands for following services
$customfields variable - stands for all custom fields that exist in your service

Important: If you want to use a {} sign in your script that has no variable inside, you must place it inside: {literal}{/literal}, for example: '{literal}{"X": "Y"}{/literal}'.
Otherwise, errors will occur.

Manage created Cloud-Init scripts, edit/delete singe scripts or use mass action to delete numerous scripts.

[edit] Server Details

In order to use the Cloud-Init successfully, you need to also provide SSH details to let the script send the IP addresses to the Proxmox server.

Move to Servers → Servers List → Details → Settings, there you will find fields that are responsible for the correct SSH connection.

SSH Host
SSH Port
SSH User
SSH Password or SSH Private Key

You also have to select the 'Snippet Storage' to locate the Cloud-Init script in the correct catalog.

[edit] Configuration Of Product

To use Cloud-Init, you need to enable it in the configuration of the Proxmox product.

Before you start, we highly recommend that you learn the details of Cloud-Init configuration on your Proxmox server first. Click here for more information included directly in the Proxmox wiki article.
Once you get familiar with Proxmox Cloud-Init, proceed to the Cloud-Init group of your KVM configuration where you can enable it as well as configure the following options:

Service Username - if enabled, the username for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, it will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template or taken from the 'Default User' field if provided.
Service Password - if enabled, the password for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, it will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template.
Service Nameservers - if enabled, the nameservers for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, they will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template.
DNS Domain - provide a DNS domain for the container. During VM creation, the setting from the host will be automatically used if neither a search domain nor a nameserver is set.
Default User - provide the username that will be used for the VM instead of using the 'Service Username' field or the default user of the configured image. Otherwise, leave empty.
Custom Cloud-Init Configuration - here you can optionally specify your custom config files that will be used instead of the automatically generated ones.
Cloud-Init Script - you may also select one of your previously created in the addon scripts, it will be executed on VM creation or package change.
Storage - the directory on which the CD-ROM ISO image is stored
Template User - if enabled, the OS template first user will be used

What is more, you can let your clients provide their own password to the VM when 'Cloud-init' is used.
To do so, use the custom field that is presented below and do not forget to tick the 'Show on Order Form' option.

In addition, you can allow clients to enter their own public keys for the VM during the ordering process, so they can log in to the server using their private key instead of a password.
To enable this function, go to the 'Custom Fields' tab and add a new 'sshkeys|SSH Public Key' field, select the 'Text Area' type and the 'Show on Order Form' checkbox.
Note: This custom field is also auto-generated from the module settings, but with the 'Admin Only' option enabled. Remember to uncheck it in order to make this field visible to clients.

Now, when the client places a new order, they will be able to enter the public key here in the OpenSSH format.

The SSH public key can also be inserted once the order has been completed. Simply click on the 'Edit' icon on the product's 'Information' panel.

The public key can be entered right there in the OpenSSH format. It can be inserted from the admin area as well.

[edit] Configuration Of Proxmox Server

The process of setting up Cloud-Init on the Proxmox server is described here.

Additionally, you can use the following commands that can be useful for debugging purposes:

Re-run Cloud-Init scripts

rm -rf /var/lib/cloud/sem/* /var/lib/cloud/instance /var/lib/cloud/instances/* &&
cloud-init init  &&
cloud-init modules -m final

Logs

cat /var/log/cloud-init.log
cat /var/log/cloud-init-output.log

[edit] Additional Storage Configuration

This is an extra option that allows for specifying additional parameters for additional disk drives.
Check how to set the product to allow clients to add disks with desired space, storage type and speed within configured limits.

Remember that the Additional Disks options in the module settings must be enabled.

1. Start with creating new selections for the "Additional Disk Space" configurable option (additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disk Space), note that you have to do that manually.

To create the configurable options, please remember to follow the below-presented pattern:

local-lvm:3 | Disk Local-LVM Storage: 3GB

Where local-lvm:3 cannot be modified, the name on the right can be freely adjusted and the unit changed.

2. Next, add an appropriate entry in the language file to display the configurable option in a user-friendly manner. Open the english.php file located in modules/servers/ProxmoxVPS/langs/english.php and find an empty string:

$_LANG['storage']['local'] = 'Local';
$_LANG['storage']['local-lvm'] = 'Local-lvm';

Modify the configurable option name that is on the right from the '=' sign.

3. Consequently, clients are now given the option to add hard disk with the custom storage type.

[edit] Management

Proxmox VPS allows your customers to manage their PVE accounts via the client area in your WHMCS system.

At the same time, you can monitor and manage each product from your WHMCS admin area.

[edit] Admin Area

In the admin area, you are able to view details and manage your clients' machines, access remote consoles, migrate VMs between nodes, assign IP addresses and view resource usage graphs.
All visible features can be turned on and off in the Proxmox Addon → Settings → Admin Area Features.

Firstly, there are the standard module commands that you can perform on the VM.
Among them, you will find actions to:
1. Manage the status of the machine,
2. Access to remote consoles
3. Migrate the server between nodes.
  You may enable 'Online' migration (no need to shut down the server before migration) and toggle 'Migration With Local Disks' which might take a while.
In this panel you will also find the basic information about the VM.
Moreover, you can change the VM hostname, ISO image, bootable devices as well as insert the SSH public key.

Note: The "Move Product/Service" action is not supported due to WHMCS limitations, and the fact that there are no hooks that would allow to catch such an event.

It is possible to fetch information of network interfaces and OS using the 'Qemu Guest Agent' tool.

This option must be previously enabled in the product configuration, and successfully installed on the VM. Afterward, it should look similar to the image below.

In the next panel, you can find IPv4 and IPv6 addresses assigned to the VM.
You can either delete or add an IP address to a product. To perform the latter action, press 'Add New IP' as shown on the following screen.

Fill in the fields to add a new IP address. At the bottom, there is a switcher 'Create Network' which, when on, forces assigning this IP address via Cloud-Init if that has been enabled and configured properly.

Important: Create Network option works for KVM configuration only.

Additionally, until the VM has been provisioned, you can manually assign to it the desired IP addresses from the pool by typing them in the 'Assigned IPs' field (available for the 'Dedicated/VPS Server' product type).
This will override the automatic IP address assignment, and the VM will use only the IP addresses you have entered in the mentioned field.

Note: The IP addresses you provide must already exist in the IP Management pool, and cannot be assigned to any other VM. This feature will not work if you already use the IP Manager For WHMCS module.

In the next two panels, you can view IPSet information as well as reinstall the VM based either on the OS or ISO template.

Graphs can be useful to monitor the usage of VM resources. You can change the interval by pressing the 'Edit' button, and simply providing a new one.

In the last part of product management, you can view the user details on your Proxmox servers along with the assigned VMID, node, VLAN tag, and SSH public key provided before the VM creation.

[edit] Management of Addon

[edit] Servers Management

[edit] Servers List

In 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Servers' → 'Servers List' you can find the configured Proxmox servers.

RAM details:

Assigned - the RAM assigned to the server (hosting services only)

Total - the full server RAM

Free - the difference between the Total and Assigned values

Suspended - the number of suspended accounts per size in MB E.g.: (1/500 MB) in case there is only one suspended account that takes up 500MB assigned to the Proxmox VPS server.

Through pressing the 'Edit' icon, you will be moved to the server edit page - see point 10 of the Server Configuration.

Press the 'More Details' icon, and you will obtain extended information on the selected server. Look below for more details.

[edit] VMs

The 'VMs' tab includes the list of virtual machines created on this server. Take a quick look at information on the domain, status, bandwidth, and IP addresses.

To view information about the VM, simply press the "More Info" icon located on the right side of the page.

Check the node and VMID:

[edit] Clusters

The next tab contains the list of clusters with information on uptime, VMS and resource limits, as well as CPU, SWAP, memory and disk usage data.

Important: Limits defined in this section are taken into account by the Load Balancer function. The Check Available Resources toggle is not affected by them.

Press the "Edit" icon to manage the node and its limits.

Allow To Create VM - if enabled, a VM can be created on this node
Virtual Machines Number - define the maximum number of VM that can be created on this node
Maximum Number of CPUs - set the top limit of CPUs on this single node
Maximum Disk Size - set the top storage size allowed on this node
Maximum RAM Size - set the maximum amount of RAM allowed on this node
Default Storage - select the default storage for the VM created on this node

Setting node limits is crucial as creating virtual machines is largely based on them, once reached, a new virtual machine cannot be created on that node.

Specify the 'Tasks Limit' here to set the maximum number of permitted backup tasks for the node you are currently modifying.

Please bear in mind that limits placed in the above section overwrite the "Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node" value defined in the Addon → Settings → Backup Tasks Limitation section.

In the last tab you may define the relation between the node and backup storage and their synchronization.

'Backup Search Storages' - here you are allowed to define which storages will be searched through while running "backupSynch" cron job for backup creation and restoration purposes.
This setting overwrites the product settings.
'Alternative Backup Storage' - if you run out of space on the storage, an alternative pointed here storage will be used to create and store the backup.
You still can restore backup from the old storage, but only if that is selected in the above "Backup Search Storages" selection.

Press 'Node Details' , and you will obtain all the summary and usage graphs:

[edit] VM Cleaner

VM Cleaner allows you to track VMs existing only on your Proxmox server, and not in your WHMCS.
Consequently, you are allowed to sort and delete only those VMs that cannot be managed in your WHMCS system.

[edit] Templates

You can view the list of templates on this page. You can easily convert any KVM machine on your server to a template.

In order to convert a VM, press the 'Create Template' button.

Next, choose a VM that shall be converted.

Fill out the 'Description' field, and press 'confirm'.
Important: The selected VM will be destroyed in the process.

You may also delete unused templates here. Delete single templates or use the mass action feature to delete templates in bulk.

[edit] Server Settings

Here you can define the VM IDs range that will be used for newly created machines on this server. Please note that you need to enable the "Use VM Ranges" setting in the product configuration in order to use this feature.
To proceed, define the ID range and save changes.

Note: VM ID range allows you to sort created machines depending on the server they were created on.
SSH Data - fill out the SSH connection details (Host, User, Posrt, Password or Private Key) to allow to locate the IP addresses on the Proxmox server (Cloud-Init)
Snippet Storage - select the catalog where the file will be uploaded (Cloud-Init)

[edit] Node Groups

Under the 'Node Groups' subsection, you can create new groups and assign nodes to them.

Provide a name of your group and allot preferred nodes from the dropdown menu.

Now, navigate to the 'Module Settings' of your product and find the 'Miscellaneous' and 'Load Balancer' sections.
Firstly, provide the 'Minimum VMID' for a VM and then select one or more of the previously created groups.

[edit] Services List

In 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Servers' → 'Services List' you can find details of any Proxmox product.

Press the 'More Details' button to preview the node and VMID information.

[edit] Recovery VM Lists

In 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Servers' → 'Recovery VM List' you can view details of the created machine.

Run the 'VM recovery synchronization' cron job to create and store full backups of VM configuration - you can find it in the point 26 of the configuration instructions.
Use the 'Export to File' button to save information in a TXT copy file.

Upon pressing the 'Details' icon, you will obtain the information on configuration, status, and DNS:

[edit] Task History

The "Task History" section includes the list of all module tasks with their most crucial details.
You may delete single tasks or use the mass action button to remove them in bulk.

Run the 'Tasks synchronization' cron job to synchronize the tasks, and view all tasks from the server - you can find it in the point 26 of the configuration instructions.

[edit] IP Management

In the 'IP Management' tab, you can manage the IP addresses of Proxmox products.
You can create both single IP addresses (IPv4 and IPv6 are supported), and IP pools which then can be assigned to created VMs.

Important!: In order to create a virtual machine, you must previously add public IP addresses.
In case you do not own any public IP addresses in the database, you must previously enable the "cloud-init" option, only then it will be possible to create a VM with a private IP address.

When you create a new IP address or a pool, you may define:

private/public address
servers or nodes that will use them
virtualization types (different VMs will use different IP pools)

Note: please go back to point 27 of the addon configuration to learn more details about adding IP addresses.

[edit] IP Logs

The 'IP Logs' includes the history of the IP addresses that were removed by the admin and which are again available in the proxmox addon IP Management pool.

Keep in mind that only addresses that were automatically added when creating the VM. Removed IP addresses, that were the manually assigned, are not logged here.

[edit] IP Manager Integration

Owing to the integration with IP Manager For WHMCS, you are able to easily create subnets with IP addresses, and assign them to the desired products.

By activating the IP Manager submodule, settings concerning IP addresses such as 'Configurable Options' and 'Default Options' will be ignored by Proxmox VPS.
Note: This integration works for LXC and KVM virtualization types.

1. Proceed to the IP Manager For WHMCS → Subnets tab in order to prepare the IP addresses subnet for Proxmox VPS For WHMCS.
2. Edit the previously created subnet, and create a custom field 'MAC Address' with a desired MAC address at each IP address in the subnet.
Note: Setting up the MAC address is optional and can be skipped.
More details about creating custom fields can be found here.

3. Afterward, create a new configuration, and assign the previously created subnet to it.
Note: Multiple subnets can be assigned to a single configuration.

4. Now, link the configuration with Proxmox VPS product via a product, server or configurable option.
On the following screen, we have carried out the linking via a product.

4. When Proxmox starts creating a virtual machine, it retrieves the assigned IP address to the service and assigns it directly to the virtual machine.

It is possible to add VLAN Tag Custom Filed in the very same way as the "MAC Address" field.
The only element you need to change is the custom field name, which should be 'Tag' in this case.

[edit] General Settings

[edit] Load Balancer

Load Balancer is an advanced tool that allows smooth rotation between nodes so as to find the most preferable one, and create virtual machine on it.

Set the weight of the resource that will prioritize its selection when sorting the nodes according to the free resources.
Note: The lowest possible weight is 1. You cannot set, e.g. 0.5.

To learn more about nodes and their allowed limits please go back to the Clusters section of this documentation.

In order to use the Load Balancer, you need to enable it in the product's configuration:

Define the behavior of the tool:

On Upgrade - select the action to perform:
- None - no action will be triggered
- Block - the upgrade process will be blocked as there are insufficient resources on the node
- Migrate - the upgrade process will be performed after the previous migration of the VM to a server with sufficient free space
Shutdown VM on Upgrade
Stop VM If Shutdown Fails
Enable to allow migrating the VM with local disks

[edit] Node Prioritization Method

Have a look at how the sorting process works, and the rules that it goes by.

Let's take exemplary weights for each resource just like the ones presented on the screen above.

VMs Number Weight: 1,5

CPU Weight: 2 

Disk Weight: 4

RAM Weight: 2,5

"Disk Weight" with the highest weight, which means it has the highest priority, and "VMs Number Weight" as the least crucial factor on a given node.

In this case, there are four nodes created, named A, B, C, and D, with current resources as shown below:

Node A (Free Ram: 60%, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 50%, Number of VMs: 5) 

Node B (Free Ram: 30%, Free CPU: 70%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Number of VMs: 10) 

Node C (Free Ram: 90%, Free CPU: 50%, Free Disk Space: 20%, Number of VMs: 20) 

Node D (Free Ram: 80%, Free CPU: 60%, Free Disk Space: 70%, Number of VMs: 15)

The next step is sorting the nodes according to each resource, it is done by assigning them corresponding priorities from 1 to 4.
The higher the priority, the more free resources available.

Priority	Free Ram	Free CPU	Free Disk Space	Number of VMs
4	Node C	Node B	Node D	Node A
3	Node D	Node D	Node A	Node B
2	Node A	Node C	Node B	Node D
1	Node B	Node A	Node C	Node C

Now, the final calculation of sorting nodes according to free resources is performed, taking into account the previously defined weights.

The process of sorting nodes is based on the following calculation method:

Final Node Priority = (RAM Priority x RAM Weight) + (CPU Priority x CPU Weight) + (Free Disk Priority x Disk Weight) + (No. VMs  Priority x VMs Weight)

The results for nodes A, B, C and D (with weights and sorting priority) are as follows:

Node A: (2 x 2,5) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 3 x 4 ) + ( 4 x 1,5 ) = 25
Node B: (1 x 2,5) + ( 4 x 2 ) + ( 2 x 4 ) + ( 3 x 1,5 ) = 23
Node C: (4 x 2,5) + ( 2 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 4 ) + ( 1 x 1,5 ) = 19,5
Node D: (3 x 2,5) + ( 3 x 2 ) + ( 4 x 4 ) + ( 2 x 1,5 ) = 32,5

As you can see, Node D has got the highest priority value with the result: 32,5.
It will be selected by Load Balancer to create a new VM on, or to migrate or upgrade an existing VM if its current node does not have sufficient resources.

The above described calculations are performed every time, 'Create' or 'Upgrade' actions are executed based on the current usage of resources on available nodes.

Important: In case a given client already has a VM existing on a node, this very node will NOT be taken into account during the prioritization of resources.
These security measures are taken to ensure that, in case of node failure, the client will still have access to the other VM server, created on another, properly working node.
At the same time, if this client has VMs on every node already, all of them will be taken into account during the prioritization process again.

If you decide to use the Load Balancer tool, define the resource weights to adjust the prioritization of nodes according to your needs.

[edit] Global Limitations

'VLANs Limit' - enter the maximum number of allowed VLANS per customer
'Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node' - put a global limit on the number of allowed tasks to create backups per node.
This general limit may be overwritten per single node in the cluster settings section at: Addon → Servers → Server Details → Edit Cluster → Tasks Limit

[edit] Task Settings

This setting can help you stay informed about failed tasks. When a threshold of task retries is reached a notification email message will be sent out.

You can set up a three-tier notification system with separate email contents.

The default email templates include:

Task name
Task ID
Client ID
Service ID
Product/Service information
Domain
Error Message

You can pick different email templates from the dropdown fields in the tasks settings or edit the default templates by navigating to 'System Settings' → 'Email Templates'.

[edit] Admin Area Features

The 'Admin Area Features' section includes a list of all possible features that can be activated and then available or not for the admin under the product's details.
Below you can find a list of features dedicated to:

Proxmox VE Cloud VPS
- Virtual Machines

Proxmox VE VPS
- Start
- Stop
- Reboot
- Shutdown
- Reinstall
- Spice Console
- noVNC console
- Xterm.js Console
- Information
- IP Set
- Graphs

Both
- Available Resources
- IP Addresses
- Migrate
- User Details
- Reconfigure Network

[edit] Scheduled Backups Templates

In this section, you can create scheduled backup templates, that can be included in your products by default.

Preparing a template means there will be no need for the clients to set up their own scheduled backups and their virtual machines will be backed up on a predefined schedule from the get-go.
Start by creating and naming a scheduled backups template.

Once the template has been created, backup tasks can be included in it.
Click on the 'Create Task Template' button.

Configure the backup schedule as you see fit, you can create as many task templates in the scheduled backups template as you need.

Start Time - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
Day of the Week - The days the backups should take place each week.
Compression type - Compression method to be used.
Backup Mode - Decide on the backup mode.
Send Email Message - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
Recipients - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma.
You can include the {clientEmail} variable to include the client's default address in the list or leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.

Click on 'Confirm' when ready.

You can add more task templates if you wish, edit or delete them.

The scheduled backup template you create can be included as the default backup schedule of your products.

The 'Scheduled Backup template' field can be found in the product's module settings under 'Backup'. You can also select the 'Scheduled Backup Email' under 'Client Notifications'.
Finally, you may allow your clients to change their scheduled backups by enabling the 'Backup Schedule' option under 'Client Area Features'.

[edit] Firewall Templates

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS allows you to prepare firewall templates for your clients. Those templates can be added to the product's configuration and will be applied in virtual machine creation.

Start by clicking on the 'Create Template' button and naming your new template.

Configure the firewall options according to the needs of your clients. Make sure to click on 'Submit' to save the changes.

Next, click on the 'Add Rule' button and add as many firewall rules as you need.

The last step is to add the firewall template to a product. Navigate to your product's module settings and find the firewall section.

[edit] Operating Systems Groups

Create Operating Systems Groups in the Proxmox Addon to allow clients to reinstall their virtual machines using the virtual machine templates that you allow.

In this section, the process of creating operating systems groups will be showcased.
Navigate to 'Settings' → 'Operating Systems Groups' and create a new group and name it.

Next we need to add templates that we want to include in this group.

Click on the 'Add Template' button and type in the name of the template that you want to include.
It is crucial the name you input in the following window does not contain any typos.
If you are not sure how your virtual machine template is named exactly. You can always check the list at a product module settings → Client Area Features → OS Templates.

Add all the templates you want to include in the group.

When finished all that remains is to add the group to the product's configuration.
Note: Keep in mind that clients will not be able to transfer from one group to another after the creation of the initial virtual machine, and will only be able to pick templates from the same group when reinstalling.

[edit] Tasks

In the "Tasks" section, you will find tasks that have already been completed, are still in progress, or are yet to be executed by the cron.
Moreover, by clicking the 'Information' button, you can display more data on the particular task.

In the information tab, you can see which specific product/service the chosen task was related to.
Moreover, in logs, you can check the API response errors with each timestamp it was returned.

Note: The logs will be displayed only in case the errors occur. If the task has finished successfully, there will be nothing to see.

If you notice that, for instance, a certain task cannot be completed due to some errors, you can remove it, so the cron no longer attempts to execute it after each iteration.
After you figure out what went wrong, you can try to add it again and check the results.

[edit] Widget

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS features a dedicated widget that displays crucial information about the module right in the WHMCS dashboard.

The information displayed includes:

Faulty VM Deployments - a list of virtual machines that failed to be created.
- Related Domain
- Virtual Machine's ID
- Related Task
- Message
Failed Tasks - a list of tasks that failed to complete
- Job ID
- Related Customer
- Related Task
- Message
Cluster Remaining Resources - a list of resources still available
- Server Name
- Remaining Virtual Machine slots
- Remaining IPv4 Addresses
- Remaining IPv6 Addresses
- Remaining IPv6 Subnet
Node Resources - a list of the nodes available
- Server Name
- Node
- Virtual Machine Limit

Each list can be hidden by disabling it in the addon's general settings.
Make sure to enable the widget in the 'Show/Hide Widgets' menu.

You can change the height of the widget by editing the 'widget.tpl' file located in '/whmcs/modules/widgets/ModulesGardenProxmoxAddon/templates'.

Find this code fragment:


<style>
    #MGProxmoxAddonWidget{
        height: 300px;
    }
</style>

and change it to include max-height: none !important;, like this:


<style>
    #MGProxmoxAddonWidget{
        height: 300px;
        max-height: none !important;
    }
</style>

Now you will be able to adjust the widget's height by editing the height: value; from the default '300px' to any value that fits your needs.

[edit] Client Area

The client area interface of Proxmox VPS For WHMCS should look like the one on the screen below.

As you can see, the control panel contains assorted options that will prove highly useful in VM management.
The module allows your customers to easily 'start', 'reboot', 'stop' and 'shutdown' their servers through pressing specific buttons.
It is also possible to 'reconfigure the network' without using the "Change Package" tool to easily update the network interfaces (KVM virtualization type only).
Clients can also access the 'noVNC' , 'SPICE' and 'Xterm.js' consoles. Among 'Additional Tools' , you will find options to 'reinstall' a server, create a 'backup' or set up 'backup jobs'.

Your clients are able to access resource usage 'graphs', view the VM 'history', manage the 'network' interface device, and set up the 'firewall' rules. Additionally, clients may take 'snapshots' , and manage 'disks'.
On the main product page in the client area, under the 'Information' headline, your clients can find such details as the current usage of CPU, memory, disk (LXC only) and SWAP (LXC only).
Customers can also view 'DNS' (LXC only) as well as assigned 'IP addresses'.

Note: The bellow example image was taken from the KVM-based VM, but it looks very similar in the case of LXC.

By clicking the 'Edit' button next to the 'Information' headline, your clients can additionally change the VM hostname and ISO image, choose boot devices, as well as insert their SSH public key.

Important: If you do not see the Edit icon, it means the option to change hostname has been turned off by the admin.
Note: Information elements included in the below table are managed by the admin in the product's configuration section under Client Area Features.

[edit] Client Area - VM Management

[edit] noVNC Console

noVNC console allows your clients to connect to their server in the easiest possible way.

[edit] SPICE Console

SPICE console enables you to connect to the virtual machine using SPICE.

Note: Since the 2.7.0 version of the module, your clients no longer need to download and install the client side SPICE application in order to connect with a VM. The console will be now opened in the virt-viewer instead.

[edit] Xterm.js Console

Xterm.js console enables you to connect to the virtual machine using Xterm.js.

You have to update the scripts on Proxmox v2.6.0. To do so, open the folder: UploadOnProxmoxServer/5.2-10 and upload the content on all your Proxmox servers.

[edit] Client Area - Additional Tools

[edit] Backups

Important! Remember that since Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module version 3.7.0, a dedicated to backups synchronization cron job must be configured.

Make sure you have set up the cron task as described in the addon configuration instruction.

To create a single backup, press the 'Backups' button, and click on 'Create Backup' as shown on the following screen.

Now, choose the compression type ( 'None' , 'LZO' or 'GZIP' ) and the backup mode ( 'Snapshot' , 'Suspend' or 'Stop' ) from dropdown menus.
Afterward, press 'Confirm'.

Note: Creating a backup is now added to the tasks list, wait a moment until the task is completed. Once ready, your new backup will appear on the list and will be available for future restoration.

Note 2: You may select the storage for created backups either in the module settings globally, or per node in the addon module (this setting overwrites the product settings).

You may mark backups as protected so they will not be unintentionally deleted.

To restore a VM from the backup, press 'Restore', and then click the 'Confirm' button in a popup window.

Above the backups list, there is a table with information on 'Available Resources'.
You will find data on limits put on backups:

Backup Size: used/allowed
Backup Files: used/allowed
Protected Backup Files: used/allowed

Next to the statistics, there is a comfortable and easy-to-read progressive chart to illustrate the usage. If the size is set to 'Unlimited', the chart does not show any progress.
Once you have reached the limits, the option to create new backups is blocked.

If you would like to restore singular files instead of the whole machine, or simply download them you can do that by clicking on the 'Browse Files' button.

[edit] Backup Collection

Open the collection of all your backups, here you will find the backups created from all your virtual machines.
You may restore this service with any backup of your choice.

[edit] Backup Jobs

Important: 'Backup Jobs' and 'Backup Schedules' are mutually exclusive and should never be used together.
'Backup Schedules' are meant to replace 'Backup Jobs' as a backup solution that involves much less load on Proxmox VE resources.

By pressing 'Backup Jobs' in the client area, you will be moved to the backup jobs management page.
You can easily edit or delete, as well as preview the details of existing backup jobs there.
To add a new backup job, press 'Create Backup Job' as shown on the following screen.

Now, define the backup start time, choose the days when to run it, and select 'Compression Type' and 'Backup Mode' from dropdown menus.
Also, select if you want to receive the notification when the backup is ready.

Finally, press the 'Confirm' button.

[edit] Backup Schedules

Important: 'Backup Jobs' and 'Backup Schedules' are mutually exclusive and should never be used together.
'Backup Schedules' are meant to replace 'Backup Jobs' as a backup solution that involves much less load on Proxmox VE resources.

If you already have 'Backup Jobs' created and would like to migrate them into Backup Schedules automatically, you should use this cron job task:

php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php migrate-backup-jobs-to-schedules --product_id=YOUR_CONFIGURED_PRODUCT_ID

You will find the cron already personalized for you in the General Settings tab.
Replace 'YOUR_CONFIGURED_PRODUCT_ID' with the ID of the product you want to perform the migration for.
The ID can be found in the URL link after selecting the product in the Products/Services tab in the admin area. Do not confuse this ID with the ID of clients' products.
Run the task for each of the products you want to perform the migration for.

'Backup Schedules' can already be created from a template while creating the virtual machine, but can still be freely customized later.
The main difference between scheduled backups and backup jobs is that the scheduled backups are handled entirely by the module instead of the Proxmox server.
You can edit or delete existing scheduled backups by using the action buttons.

You may also schedule new backups by clicking on the 'Create Backup Schedule' button.

Configure the backup schedule as you see fit, you can create as many task templates in the scheduled backups template as you need.

Start Time - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
Day of the Week - The days the backups should take place each week.
Compression type - Compression method to be used.
Backup Mode - Decide on the backup mode.
Send Email Message - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
Recipients - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma. Leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.

Click on 'Confirm' when ready.

[edit] Disks (KVM only)

View available disks and add new ones.

Define the additional disk size, choose its bus (the available options may be 'IDE', 'SATA', 'VIRTIO' or 'SCSI' ), as well as define a disk format - you can choose from 'Raw disk image (raw)', 'QEMU image format (qcow2)', or 'VM image format (VMDK)' .

[edit] Firewall

Owing to the 'Firewall' page, your clients can set up firewall rules and enable a security group for their servers from the WHMCS client area.

As you can see, you can easily modify and remove the previously added rules and security groups.
To add a new firewall rule press the 'Confirm' button.

You can add a firewall rule in two ways. Both of them require choosing a direction, action, interface, source, and destination.

The first way (orange) is to choose macro from the 'Macro' dropdown field.
The second way (blue) requires you to choose a protocol and fill in both the source and destination ports.
Additionally, you can enable a rule, and add a comment to it.
Press 'Confirm' to create a rule.

Among 'Additional Actions' you will find three options:

Add Security group - choose a security group and an interface on which the group will be used on.
Additionally, you can enable a security group, and add a comment to it. Click 'Confirm' to use the security group.

Download Rules - use this option to simply create a backup, once pressed, a file will be downloaded
Restore Rules - restore any of the previously created backups created. Select one of the previously downloaded files with rules

You may manage the hierarchy of rules on the list. In front of each rule, you can find its 'Position' marker.
The higher the rule is on the list, the higher priority the rule has assigned. You may change the rule position using the 'Move up/down' arrows.

[edit] Firewall Options

Here you can view the current firewall settings. To decide on its options, press the 'Edit' button, and adjust them to your needs.

[edit] Graphs

Through pressing the 'Graphs' button, clients will be moved to the page with the generated graphs showing the CPU and memory usage, network traffic, and disk I/O.

They can also switch the timeline of graphs by choosing a new one from a dropdown menu indicated on the following screen. Clients can pick between 'Hour', 'Day', 'Week', 'Moth' and 'Year'.

[edit] Network

Your clients are allowed to add and remove only private network interface devices. Additionally, they may assign other virtual machines to the network, enabling communication between them.

Upon clicking the 'Information' button, the new popup will open with more network details.

The 'Assign Virtual Machine' button opens another popup window, where virtual machines to be assigned to the network can be selected and optionally restarted.
A restart is necessary for the changes to be applied if the hotplug functionality is not configured for the virtual machine.
You can find an exemplary scenario illustrating a typical use case of this function in the 'Use Cases' section of this wiki.

Finally, the 'Delete' button will remove the network.

Keep in mind that ' Network device' options have to be set to 'Private'.
Also, after the network creation, the button to add another one or delete a newly created private network may not be longer available, depending on your Proxmox configuration.

[edit] Reinstallation

The "Reinstallation" feature can be used to reinstall a new OS on the VM directly by the clients.

You can allow your clients to either select a new OS from the provided KVM templates to automatically replace the system, or let them choose the ISO image for manual system installation.

Note: The ISO images can only be used for the KVM virtualization type, while VM templates can be used either for KVM or LXC.
Additionally, both KVM and LXC users can define the new OS password before a new installation.

Remember to grant your clients access to the selected reinstallation types in the 'Client Area Features' , as well as choose the available 'OS Images' and 'ISO Images' .

[edit] Resource Notifications

Within the "Resource Notifications" section, you can configure personalized notifications regarding your machine's utilization.
By creating "Resource Notifications", you enable the system to automatically send email alerts whenever your server exceeds predefined thresholds for network traffic, disk read and write operations, CPU utilization, and memory usage within a specified time frame.
These notifications serve as indicators, ensuring that you stay informed about any significant deviations from normal resource utilization, enabling you to take timely action and maintain optimal performance.

To create the first notification rule press the 'Create Notification' button.
A dedicated form will appear, fill in the described below fields to compose the notification requirements:

Name - enter the rule name
Status - set it to enabled or disabled, can be changed later on
Notifications Interval - define the time interval between notifications in hours. Eg. 8 - notifications will be sent in this frequency
Data Timeframe - specify the time duration to extract and verify data usage (in minutes, eg. 30)
Exceed All - if enabled, all the below setup conditions will have to be met to send the notification
Email Address - if you want to send the notification to other addresses than the main customer's address, enter them here separated by a comma
Conditions for:
- Network Traffic [%] - sum of Net In and Net Out expressed in percentage value towards Rate Limit Network
- CPU Usage [%] - a percentage that represents the overall utilization of CPU. It indicates how much of the CPU's processing capability is being utilized.
- Memory Usage [%] - percentage of memory usage towards the VM RAM
- Disk Read [%] and Disk Write [%] - disk usage percentage is calculated based on the Hard Disk Speed limits (respectively: Read Limit and Write Limit).
  If there are no limits set for Hard Disk Speed, the dedicated fields in the client area ('Disk Read [%]' and 'Disk Write [%]') will not be displayed

A ready notification rule appears on the list, here you may quickly turn it on/off (1) depending on your current needs, change (2) the rules or delete (3) the notification.

[edit] Snapshots

Use a snapshot to remember the current contents of the virtual machine memory. You may use them later to restore the VM's settings.
Please remember that it is necessary to run the following cron command for snapshot jobs.
You may set the cron command once a day or every hour. Do not forget to replace 'your_whmcs' with your WHMCS root location.

 php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php snapshots

Press the 'Take Snapshot' button and fill out the form to take a snapshot.
Name it (use the alphabetical characters and no spaces), choose whether to include RAM, and add a description.

It is also possible to set up 'Snapshot Jobs' where snapshots can be created according to your preferences (daily or hourly). Click on 'New Job' in order to add a new snapshot job.

As you complete the form, remember to fill in the 'Name' field without spaces or special characters- only capital letters and numbers are allowed here.

[edit] Task History

To access the history of a machine, simply press the 'Task History' button. Afterward, the customer can see all the actions performed on the VM, as well as their status.

If an error has occurred during the execution of a task, the client can view the API response error by clicking on the 'Information' icon.

[edit] VM Power Tasks

The "VM Power Tasks" section empowers you to effortlessly create and manage automated power tasks for your virtual machine, all in one convenient location.
With the ability to define task rules, you can automate multiple actions and minimize your manual intervention in VM operations.

To begin configuring your first rule, simply click on "Add Task".

A new form will appear with the following options to provide:

Description - task description or short name
Action - select the action the task is to execute:
- Start the machine
- Stop the machine
- Reboot the machine
Specify the exact time to keep the task active:
- Start Date (use the calendar to specify the task beginning date)
- Start Time - provide the exact hour to activate the task
- End Date (use the calendar to specify the task ending date)
- End Time - provide the exact hour to deactivate the task
Job Type - choose the task type and define its execution frequency
- One Time - the job will be executed only once, specify the time to start the task:
  - Job Hour
  - Job Minutes (rounded to 5 minutes)
- Daily - the job will be executed every day of the week, specify the time to start the task:
  - Job Hour
  - Job Minutes (rounded to 5 minutes)
- Weekday - the job will be executed on selected days, specify the time to start the task:
  - Job Hour
  - Job Minutes (rounded to 5 minutes)
  - Day of Week - select days when the task will be executed

The power tasks list provides a comprehensive overview of all the tasks associated with power management on your virtual machine.
You can easily identify active actions tasks, ensuring that your virtual machine operates according to your desired configurations.
Additionally, the flexibility to modify existing rules (1) allows you to adjust the tasks' parameters to align with your needs. If necessary, you can also remove unwanted tasks from the list (2).

Important: "VM Powre Tasks" require a dedicated cron job to be set up by the administrator.

[edit] Configurable Options

When you successfully set up a product, your client can order it by choosing from the default configurable options.

Important: Storage Disc Space configurable option, when used by the client, overwrites the product configuration 'Disk Space ' option.

In case those options do not suit your needs, you can edit them.

Go to 'System Settings' → 'Products/Services' → 'Configurable Option' and press the edit button next to the configurable option used by your product.

Here you can view all the products this configurable option group is assigned to.

Now, we will show you how to edit options. Let's say you want to add an option to order a VPS with 4 cores per socket.
To do so, edit 'The number of cores per socket' by pressing the edit button as shown on the screen below.

You will see a popup window, so make sure your browser does not block it.

To add a new option, enter it in the textbox located below all other options. If you want to replace the option you currently have, simply edit the textbox.
Finish by pressing 'Save Changes'.

More information about WHMCS configurable options and their editing can be found here.

[edit] List of Configurable Options

The table below lists all configurable options used by the module for the chosen virtualization type.
Note that the name on the left is a variable (which you should not edit), separated by the | from the editable custom name.

KVM	LXC
The number of CPU sockets\|CPU Sockets	cores\|CPU Cores
The number of cores per socket\|CPU Cores	cpulimit\|Limit Of CPU
cpulimit\|Limit Of CPU	CPU units for a VM\|CPU Units For The VM
CPU weight for a VM\|CPU Units For The VM	Amount of RAM\|Amount Of RAM
Amount of RAM\|Amount Of RAM	Amount of SWAP\|Amount Of SWAP
Disk Space\|Disk Space	Disk Space\|Disk Space
additionalDisksSpace\|Additional Disks Space	additionalDisksSpace\|Additional Disks Space
additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]\|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]	additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]\|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]
IP Addresses\|IPv4 Addresses	IP Addresses\|IPv4 Addresses
IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Addresses	IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Addresses
IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Subnets	IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Subnets
privateNetwork\|Private Network	privateNetwork\|Private Network
Backups Limit\|Backups Size	Backups Limit\|Backups Size
Backups Files Limit\|Backup Files	Backups Files Limit\|Backup Files
backupProtectedFiles\|Protected Backup Files	backupProtectedFiles\|Protected Backup Files
snapshots\|Snapshots	snapshots\|Snapshots
snapshotJobs\|Snapshot Jobs	snapshotJobs\|Snapshot Jobs
Bandwidth\|Bandwidth	Bandwidth\|Bandwidth
VM Template\|VM Template	VM Template\|VM Template
archive\|Archive	archive\|Archive
Network Rate\|Network Rate	Network Rate\|Network Rate
vcpus\|VCPUs	tag\|Tag
ISO Image\|ISO Image	storage\|Storage Disk Space
osType\|OS Type
cicustom\|Custom Cloud-Init Configuration
ciscript\|Cloud-Init Script
tag\|Tag
storage\|Storage Disk Space

Differences between the cicustom and the ciscript configurable options:

cicustom - it is a more advanced alternative to the "ciscript" configurable option. Using the "cicustom" option results in sending the configuration specified by the administrator.
ciscript - using the "ciscript" option results in passing the script ID available in Proxmox Addon, which will be uploaded to the snippet storage and passed to the Proxmox VE server during the virtual machine creation.

[edit] Integration with Products Reseller For WHMCS

The close integration of Products Reseller For WHMCS with Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS will certainly bring advantages to your business.
You will be able to resell your Proxmox VE VPS servers using WHMCS or any other platform.
Thanks to extra settings available only for 'Proxmox VE VPS' products, your resellers are granted the possibility to customize offered services to meet clients’ needs.
Moreover, you can easily monitor the income and manage your reseller groups.

In the 'Products Reseller For WHMCS' module, you can handily create your own integrations as well as assign as many various 'Proxmox VE VPS' products as you wish.

In addition, the extra setting options that are available only for 'Proxmox VE VPS' products will definitely make your offer more competitive.

Once an order is placed, the enabled setting options will appear in the side menu along with additional information about the 'Proxmox VE VPS' product at the bottom of the page.
Now, the 'Proxmox VE VPS' product can be simply administered straight from the client area.

What is also important is that you can keep under control all key details such as orders, income, and groups of resellers straight from the 'Products Reseller' panel.
If you want to find out more about the Products Reseller For WHMCS module, please proceed here

[edit] Management of Billing

When you combine Proxmox VPS For WHMCS with Advanced Billing For WHMCS, you will be able to set up additional billing options.

The module allows you to charge your customers based on the server resources they have used.
Note: Advanced Billing supports OpenVZ (prior to Proxmox v2.3.0), KVM and the LXC virtualization type.

With Advanced Billing For WHMCS module, you can also display the current resource usage of your customer's server, as well as its total cost.

[edit] Management of Existing Accounts

You can easily use Proxmox VE VPS module with your existing Proxmox accounts. To do so, follow the instructions below:
1. Create and configure a Proxmox VE VPS server, and a server group.
2. Create and configure a Proxmox VE VPS product.
3. Place a new order with the previously created product for your customer. Do not activate the product yet.
4. Access the just created product from the admin area via the Client Profile → 'Products/Services' section and fill out 2 custom fields.
They are 'VMID' and 'Node' .

5. If possible, enter IP addresses into fields 'Dedicated IP' and 'Assigned IPs' .

6. Set the product status to 'Active' .
Remember not to click the 'Create' button during the entire process. That would unnecessarily create a new virtual machine.

[edit] Servers Location Management

Important: Server Allocator For WHMCS is required to allow location management.

In order to allow defining locations for Proxmox VPS, follow the below steps:
1. In your product's 'Module Settings' , set up 'Default Node' to 'Server-Node'.
2. Create a WHMCS server for each Proxmox node.
3. Manually create a configurable option, name it e.g.: 'Location'. Add options for each server within that configurable option.
4. Install our Server Allocator For WHMCS module and configure it properly.

It must assign a server to a product depending on the selected option in 'Location' configurable option.

Keep in mind that all locations need to have exactly the same configuration.

Now, a client may order a VPS, and select 'Location'. Server Allocator For WHMCS will change the server assigned to the product.

The "Create" action is triggered on the assigned server due to the 'Server-Node' option enabled.

[edit] Use Cases

In this section, you will find exemplary scenarios illustrating typical use cases, along with specifics on how the module's functionalities can be applied in practice.

Review the following scenarios for practical examples of the module usage.

[edit] Selling Predefined Windows Virtual Machines

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS can be used to sell predefined Windows-based virtual machines. Follow the instructions below, to prepare the template for Windows Virtual Machines and configure the module.
Keep in mind that the instructions are for Kernel-based Virtual Machines (KVM) only.

First, a template virtual machine needs to be prepared in Proxmox:

1. Start a new virtual machine with a Windows Installer ISO file mounted.
2. Make sure the 'OS Type' in the virtual machine's options includes 'Windows.'
3. Install 'Windows Operating System' on the virtual machine.
4. Install 'Qemu Guest Agent.' The module will detect and run it if the OS Type is set to Windows.
5. Stop the virtual machine. You can delete the CD Drive (it will not be needed anymore).
6. Convert the virtual machine to a template.
7. If you are using 'Shared Storage,' upload the template to it. If you do not use 'Shared Storage,' make sure to upload the template to every node.

Next, the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module settings need to be correctly configured:

1. Enable the 'Guest Agent' in the product's module settings.

2. Generate 'Configurable Options' responsible for the virtual machine templates. Including only Windows templates in the Configurable Options is recommended.

[edit] Selling Predefined Linux Virtual Machines

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS can be used to sell predefined Linux-based virtual machines. Follow the instructions below, to prepare the template for Linux Virtual Machines and configure the module.
Keep in mind that the instructions are for Kernel-based Virtual Machines (KVM) only.

First, a template virtual machine needs to be prepared in Proxmox:

1. Create a template Cloud-Init virtual machine based on this documentation.
2. If you would like to make additional changes in the template (e.g. login with a password, root access via SSH) then:

Create a new virtual machine with the template from step 1.
Log in to the virtual machine.
Introduce any changes you want the new template to have.
Convert the virtual machine to a new template.

3. If you are using 'Shared Storage,' upload the template to it. If you are not using 'Shared Storage', you will need to upload the template to every node.

Next, the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module settings need to be correctly configured:

1. Make sure 'Cloud-Init' is enabled in the product's module settings.

2. Define which 'OS Templates' will be available in the Reinstall section in the client area.

3. Generate 'Configurable Options' responsible for the virtual machine templates.

Optionally, set prices for 'VM Template Configurable Options.' Navigate to 'System Settings' → 'Products/Services' → 'Configurable Options.' in order to do so.

[edit] Connecting Multiple VPS Machines Into One Private Network

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS allows connecting multiple VPS machines into one private network.
To do so, you will need at least 2 virtual machines. In our case, the hostname of the first virtual machine is: 'virtualmachine1.com' and the hostname of the second one is: 'virtualmachine2.com.'

First, pick one of the machines and navigate to 'Additional Tools' → 'Network' in your client area.

Once there, assign a new private network to the virtual machine you have selected by clicking on the 'Create Private Network' button.
If there are any private IP addresses available, a new network will be created and this virtual machine will be assigned to it.

Now, you can assign other virtual machines you own to this very network. Click on the 'Assign Virtual Machine' button.

Select the virtual machine that you want to add to the network. You can identify it by its hostname. In our case, we want to add 'virtualmachine2.com.'
Restarting the virtual machine is optional, but recommended, as it will allow it to connect to the network as soon as possible.
Note: The reason for this is that if the virtual machine does not have the hotplug functionality configured, it has to be restarted for the change to be implemented.

After clicking on 'Confirm' button, you should receive information stating that the virtual machine has been successfully assigned to the private network.

[edit] Selling Virtual Machine Upgrades

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS integrates WHMCS 'Upgrades' and 'Configurable Options' to enable clients to change their virtual machine's specification.

See the instructions below on how those functions work with the module.
Please note that:

When an upgrade is performed and the template of the virtual machine changes, the machine will always be reinstalled.
Upgrades can only be performed within the same type of products, i.e. KVM to KVM; LXC to LXC.
Disk size downgrading is not supported.
For more information regarding the WHMCS product upgrade function, visit this guide.

Upgrading from one product to another.

1. Configure the first product as you normally would. For the sake of an example, in the product's module settings, we will set the limits to 4GiB of disk space, and 512MiB of RAM.

2. Create another product in the same way, but this time with higher limits. For the second product, we will set the limits to 6GiB of disk space, and 1024MiB of RAM.
Of course, you can change any properties of the products as you see fit.

3. Open the 'Upgrades' section of the first product and select the products you would like to allow the clients to upgrade it to.
In our case, we will choose the newly created 6GB product.

4. In the client area, a new option will be visible, and the client will be able to place an order to upgrade their product.

5. Once the order is accepted, the virtual machine has to be rebooted for the upgrade to take place.

The changes will immediately be visible in the client area and the admin area.

Another way for the client to upgrade their virtual machines is to utilize the 'Configurable Options' function instead. In this way, all the changes in the specification will take place within the same product.

1. For the products that have the 'Configurable Options' assigned, you can use those as an upgrade option. Tick the 'Configurable Options' checkbox in the 'Upgrades' section.

2. In the client area, a new option to upgrade the configurable options will be displayed.

3. Clients will be able to pick their configuration again, all within the possible range that you have defined in configurable options.
If you prepare configurable options for, say, the number of snapshots, the client will be able to pay for an increased limit of snapshots.

4. After the order is accepted, the configuration will update once the virtual machine is rebooted.

The changes will immediately be visible in the client admin areas.

[edit] Selling Additional Storage

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS can take advantage of the 'Configurable Options' function to allow admins to sell additional storage space to their clients.
Follow the instructions below, to see how to set up additional storage space options for your clients.

In the product's module settings, at the very bottom, you can find a list of available configurable options. The ones that we are interested in right now are:

additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disks Space

and

additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]|Additional Disk Space (STORAGE_NAME)

The difference between them is that 'additionalDisksSpace' can include any combination of any storage detected on your server, but only one option can be selected.
In the case of 'additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]' only the chosen storage will be included in the options.
Still, you can set multiple configurable options of this type, allowing the client to freely choose how much of which storage they would like to buy.

Click on 'Create Configurable Options' and select relevant options to generate a template that you can edit under 'System Settings' → 'Products/Services' → 'Configurable Options.'

Note: You can also create them manually if you prefer.

Here is an example 'additionalDisksSpace' configurable option:

Option name - you can change the display name after the '|' symbol.
Options - the possible options the client will be able to choose from, the left side has to be specifically '[storage_name]:[size];[another_storage_name]:[size]' while the right side is what the client will see.
Storage can be combined into one option if you put a semicolon between each storage name. An option to not buy any additional storage is represented with '-1.'
Pricing - set an individual price for every option.

The option to buy additional storage space will now be displayed in the client area while ordering a new product, or upgrading configurable options.

While using the 'additionalDisksSpac' configurable option, only strict storage configurations defined by the administrator are available.

The 'additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]' configurable option can be used to achieve a different effect.
Set up multiple configurable options like on the screen below.

Option name - this time the left side defines the storage type for all options.
Options - the left side only includes the number of gigabytes.
Pricing - make sure to set a price for each option.

Once configurable options for every storage are created, the clients will be able to freely choose their own combinations.

After the order for additional storage is accepted, the user may create additional disks as they see fit, within the limits specified when placing the order and the product's module settings.

Here is an explanation of each field:

Size - the size of the new disk. Limited by the purchased additional storage, limits are unique to each storage type.
Storage Type - similarly limited by the purchased additional storage.
Note: While there is an option to pick a default storage type in the product's module settings, the clients will still need to buy the storage space to create an additional disk on it.
Bus - the type of interface the disk uses, the options can be specified in the product's module settings, under 'Additional Disks' → 'Additional Disk Type' .
Format - the format the disk will use, the options can be specified in the product's module settings, under 'Additional Disks' → 'Additional Disk Format' .

If you would like to change how the storage types are displayed to the client, you can do so.

1. Find and edit the english.php file located in modules/servers/ProxmoxVPS/langs/english.php.
2. Find the line responsible for the display name of your additional storage, it should look like this:

$_LANG['storage']['local-lvm'] = 'Local-lvm';

3. The text after the '=' is the display name and can be edited.
4. The string in the second bracket is the storage type. You can add more lines in the same manner, for each of your storage type configurable options, like so:

$_LANG['storage']['local-ssd'] = 'SSD Storage';

The virtual machine has to be rebooted before the new disks are enabled and usable.

[edit] Scheduling Backups

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS can be used to plan and handle scheduled backups. This feature in conjunction with limiting backup tasks per node can substantially offload your Proxmox platform.

To start scheduling backups navigate to 'Additional Tools' → 'Backup Schedules' and click on 'Create Backup Schedule'.
Alternatively, you can prepare templates to automate this process.
Note: Make sure that backup schedules are enabled in the product's module settings under 'Client Area Features'.

A configuration window for the first schedule will open. Set up as many schedules as you need.

Start Time - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
Day of the Week - The days the backups should occur each week.
Compression type - Compression method to be used.
Backup Mode - Decide on the backup mode.
Send Email Message - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
Recipients - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma. Leave the field empty to only send the notification to the default address.

Click on 'Confirm' when ready.

Now that the backups are scheduled, they will be mostly handled by the module, but you can further reduce the stress put on your Proxmox platform by limiting backup-related tasks per node.

Open the Proxmox Addon in your admin area and navigate to 'General Settings' . Find the 'Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node' and reduce the number, decreasing the load on your Proxmox platform.
Remember to save changes each time you change the limit.

[edit] Including Predefined Backup Schedules

You can include scheduled backup templates with Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS products. This negates the need to set up backup schedules for each client.
A template only has to be prepared once and will be included with every product you choose.

To set up a template, open the Proxmox Addon and navigate to 'Settings' → 'Scheduled Backups Templates', click on 'Create Scheduled Backups Template' and name the template.

Next, click on 'Create Task Template' and define the following details. You can create multiple task templates.

Start Time - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
Day of the Week - The days the backups should occur each week.
Compression type - Compression method to be used.
Backup Mode - Decide on the backup mode.
Send Email Message - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
Recipients - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma.
You can include the {clientEmail} variable to include the client's default address in the list or leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.

Click on 'Confirm' when ready.

Once the template is created, it can be included in the product's module settings.
Each time a new virtual machine is created using this configuration, the scheduled backups will be set up according to the template.
Remember to save changes each time you change module settings.

[edit] Including Predefined Firewall Settings

You can include firewall templates with Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS products, which eliminates the need to set up firewall settings for each individual client.
A template only needs to be prepared once and will be included with every product.

To set up a template, open the Proxmox Addon, navigate to 'Settings' → 'Firewall Templates', click on 'Create Template', and name the template.

Configure the template's firewall settings as needed for the specific product and click on 'Submit'. You can also add firewall rules to the template, proceed to 'Add Rule'.

Prepare as many rules as you need for the given template.

Once a template is created all that remains is to include it in a product's module settings. Remember to save changes.

Every virtual machine created with the firewall template included in the configuration will have its firewall preset, eliminating the need to manually configure the firewall for each machine.

[edit] Incorporating Operating Systems Groups

In Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS you may categorize your operating system templates into groups.
When a virtual machine is created for the first time using a specific template, future reinstallations are limited to templates included in the same groups.

To create operating systems groups open the Proxmox Addon and navigate to 'Settings' → 'Operating Systems Group'.
Click on 'Create Operating Systems Group' and name your group.

Click on 'Add Template' and type in the exact name of the operating system template.
If you need a reminder, you can see the list of your operating system templates in, for example, the module settings → 'Virtual Machine Configuration' → 'OS Template'.

Add all the templates that you want to include in the group.

Repeat the process for different operating systems groups.

In this example, we will create a group for free Linux systems and another one for Windows.

After the groups are created, open a product's module settings and find 'OS Groups' under 'Client Area Features'.
Pick the groups you would like to include from the list.

Keep in mind that if the template used by the virtual machine is featured in more than one group, clients will be able to reinstall their virtual machines using any template included across all of the mentioned groups,
as long as those groups are included in the product's module settings.
Note: Once a product is categorized into a group, the 'OS Templates' field will not be taken into account while displaying available templates.

Once the client's virtual machine is created, the 'Reinstall' function will be limited by the operating systems groups.

In this example, the client chooses 'Ubuntu' in the order form, so after machine creation, he can only reinstall within the 'Linux systems' group.
If the client chooses 'Windows 11', he will be locked to the 'Windows systems' group.
If we included Ubuntu in the 'Windows systems' group, the client would be able to reinstall to every system included within those two groups.

With the current configuration, this client can only reinstall to Windows (and change his operating systems group) by upgrading his product.

Admins can check and manually change the base template, and by extension, the operating systems group.

The information is recorded in the 'Base Template' custom field.

[edit] Using Load Balancer

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS includes a load balancer feature that can help you make sure your server resources are used efficiently. Some of the possible setups include:

Setting up an equal number of virtual machines on each node.
Migrating virtual machines on upgrade when a node runs out of free space.
And much more.

The general information can be found in the dedicated section of the wiki. Here are two practical examples of the load balancer working in practical scenarios.

Example 1
If we have two uneven nodes, for example, one with 64 CPU (A) and another with only 32 CPU (B), we can use the load balancer to make sure the smaller one doesn't reach its full load too fast.
Imagine you didn't set up the load balancer to favor the CPU, and the nodes were assigned an equal number of virtual machines. The load could look somewhat like this:

Node A (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 80%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Free RAM: 60%)

Node B (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Free RAM: 60%)

If the creation of new virtual machines continues, node B will run out of free CPU soon.
If we set up the load balancer in this way:

VMs Number Weight: 1

CPU Weight: 10 

Disk Weight: 2

RAM Weight: 3

This is how the calculation will go:

Node A: (1 x 1) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 3 ) = 26
Node B: (1 x 1) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 3 ) = 16

Node A gets the higher number, so virtual machines will be created on node A until the free CPU resource priority changes in favor of node B.
In this way, node B will no longer run out of free CPU any faster than node A.
Note: You can of course use different weights, the important part is that you put emphasis on the CPU Weight, and make it significantly bigger than the rest.

Example 2
Here is another example. Let's say we have 2 nodes with the same specification, but we allow our customers to personalize their virtual machines with bigger disk space, RAM, etc.
If we only use the number of virtual machines in the calculation, the free resources on the nodes will be uneven:

Node A (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 50%, Free RAM: 60%)

Node B (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 50%, Free Disk Space: 12%, Free RAM: 40%)

But if we set up the load balancer to not favor the number of virtual machines, but the resources equality:

VMs Number Weight: 1

CPU Weight: 10 

Disk Weight: 10

RAM Weight: 10

The calculation will look like this:

Node A: (1 x 1) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 2 x 10 ) = 51
Node B: (1 x 1) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 10 ) = 41

The virtual machines will be placed on node A, as long as it has more free resources, the number of virtual machines hardly matters anymore.
Node B will be used again when it has more free resources than node A.

[edit] Changing Bandwidth Usage Reset Date

By default the bandwidth usage in Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS resets each month, on the day of the product registration.

If the product was first registered 21st of March, the bandwidth will reset on the 21st of each month.

There is however, an option to have the bandwidth usage reset on the first day of the month. This can be beneficial for easier billing, easier usage tracking, and reduced confusion in general.
It might also be a good idea if you want all of your customers to have their bandwidth usage reset on the exact same day.

To make this change, navigate to the product's module settings and the 'General' section, where you will find the 'Reset Usage First Day of Month' switch.
Turning the switch on will change the reset day.

[edit] Providing rDNS Management for Proxmox VE VPS

With DNS Manager For WHMCS, you can offer clients the ability to manage rDNS records for IP addresses allocated to their ordered servers.

Learn more about this feature and how it integrates with Proxmox VE VPS in a dedicated section of DNS Manager For WHMCS documentation page.

[edit] Tips

1. Operations performed on the virtual servers are not executed immediately. Give your Proxmox Virtual Environment some time to process the request and execute the operation.

2. Multiple physical Proxmox servers can be joined into one cluster.

When they are joined into one cluster, you can access all of them by connecting to just one.

Auto-node - creates a new VM on the server (node) with the most free resources, so the administrator cannot control it
Server-node - creates a VM on the server (node) whose IP address or node host (e.g. node1.yourproxmox.com) was provided during the WHMCS's server configuration,
allowing the administrator to control the node choice

3. If you set the product type to 'Hosting Account' when adding a new product, you will not need to fill out nameservers as they will be automatically set up.
But if you still want to use the 'Server/VPS' product type, this article might help you in learning how to remove nameservers from your order template.

4. OS Templates are not automatically downloaded while configuring a product.
For each virtualization type, templates are downloaded from the Proxmox server depending on which one they are generated on.

5. OS Templates are loaded from the storage. Make sure the module can access its content by selecting appropriate permissions for the chosen storage.

6. When the PAM authentication is used, it is necessary to create a client first in order to change the password correctly. Read more about it here.

7. As this module supports the templates system, any changes made in the module's template files will be saved after the upgrade process.

8. If you are using the module in the 2.3.2 version or any previous one, and would like to migrate to Proxmox VE V5.X, you need to update the files on your Proxmox server to the new version from the 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' folder.

9. OS Templates serve only as operating systems for the VM, while VM Templates contain complete configuration of the VM, the amount of resources included.

10. You can use the {$service_assigned_ips} tag in your welcome email template to display automatically assigned IP addresses for the created VM (either the KVM or LXC virtualization type).
Other available tags in the 'Client Notifications' emails:

{$user.username}
{$user.password}
{$user.realm}

If you wish you may add other information, like password, into the email, just refer to e.g. 'VPS Server Welcome Email' email template in your WHMCS to find appropriate merge fields.
Important: Remember that if the client's email address is incorrect or WHMCS is not able to correctly send it because of any reason, the module will not create the VM for that client correctly.

11. 'One User Per VPS' option allows you to either create a new username for each new client's VM, or create only one that will be then used for every new VM owned by your client.

12. You can use the 'IPSet IP Filter' option for firewall to prevent IP spoofing. Click here to read more about IP Sets.

Inside the admin area, in the product details view, you can preview the current IP Sets on VM:

13. You can enable 'Admin Notifications' on product configuration to be informed via email about certain actions. These are:

Service Creation Failed - if there were any errors that prevented the VM from being successfully created, then the selected email template will be sent to the administrator
Upgrade - select the email notification template you want to receive if the client requests the product upgrade.
This will also block the automatic sending of an upgrade request to the Proxmox API, so the administrator can review it first.
Note that, if chosen, the product will still be upgraded in the WHMCS itself, but the upgrade request will not be passed to the API.
To finalize the upgrade, use the "Change Package" module command in your admin area.
To-Do List - if checked, in addition to sending any of the above notifications, it will also add them as tasks on the WHMCS To-Do List.

Default email templates include basic variables, but you can include more, such as:

service_customfields - any custom fields defined for the service, for example:

{$service_customfields.vmid}	{$service_customfields.node}
{$service_customfields.userName}	{$service_customfields.cipassword}
{$service_customfields.sshkeys}	{$service_customfields.baseTemplate}

client- client data from WHMCS:

{$client.userid}	{$client.client_id}	{$client.id}
{$client.owner_user_id}	{$client.uuid}	{$client.firstname}
{$client.lastname}	{$client.fullname}	{$client.companyname}
{$client.email}	{$client.address1}	{$client.address2}
{$client.city}	{$client.fullstate}	{$client.state}
{$client.postcode}	{$client.countrycode}	{$client.country}
{$client.phonenumber}	{$client.tax_id}	{$client.email_preferences}
{$client.statecode}	{$client.countryname}	{$client.phonecc}
{$client.phonenumberformatted}	{$client.telephoneNumber}	{$client.billingcid}
{$client.notes}	{$client.currency}	{$client.defaultgateway}
{$client.cctype}	{$client.cclastfour}	{$client.gatewayid}
{$client.groupid}	{$client.status}	{$client.credit}
{$client.taxexempt}	{$client.latefeeoveride}	{$client.overideduenotices}
{$client.separateinvoices}	{$client.disableautocc}	{$client.emailoptout}
{$client.marketing_emails_opt_in}	{$client.overrideautoclose}	{$client.allowSingleSignOn}
{$client.email_verified}	{$client.language}	{$client.isOptedInToMarketingEmails}
{$client.tax_state}	{$client.tax_countrycode}	{$client.lastlogin}
{$client.customfields}	{$client.customfields1}	{$client.customfields2}
{$client.customfields3}	{$client.customfields3}

vm- virtual machine related data, as long as it is present:

{$vm.digest}	{$vm.acpi}	{$vm.affinity}
{$vm.agent}	{$vm.arch}	{$vm.args}
{$vm.audio0}	{$vm.autostart}	{$vm.balloon}
{$vm.bios}	{$vm.boot}	{$vm.bootdisk}
{$vm.cdrom}	{$vm.cicustom}	{$vm.cipassword}
{$vm.citype}	{$vm.ciupgrade}	{$vm.ciuser}
{$vm.cores}	{$vm.cpu}	{$vm.cpulimit}
{$vm.cpuunits}	{$vm.description}	{$vm.efidisk0}
{$vm.freeze}	{$vm.hookscript}	{$vm.hostpci[n]}
{$vm.hotplug}	{$vm.hugepages}	{$vm.ide[n]}
{$vm.ipconfig[n]}	{$vm.ivshmem}	{$vm.keephugepages}
{$vm.keyboard}	{$vm.kvm}	{$vm.localtime}
{$vm.lock}	{$vm.machine}	{$vm.memory}
{$vm.migrate_downtime}	{$vm.migrate_speed}	{$vm.name}
{$vm.nameserver}	{$vm.net[n]}	{$vm.numa}
{$vm.numa[n]}	{$vm.onboot}	{$vm.ostype}
{$vm.parallel[n]}	{$vm.protection}	{$vm.reboot}
{$vm.rng0}	{$vm.sata[n]}	{$vm.scsi[n]}
{$vm.scsihw}	{$vm.searchdomain}	{$vm.serial[n]}
{$vm.shares}	{$vm.smbios1}	{$vm.smp}
{$vm.sockets}	{$vm.spice_enhancements}	{$vm.sshkeys}
{$vm.startdate}	{$vm.startup}	{$vm.tablet}
{$vm.tags}	{$vm.tdf}	{$vm.template}
{$vm.tpmstate0}	{$vm.unused[n]}	{$vm.usb[n]}
{$vm.vcpus}	{$vm.vga}	{$vm.virtio[n]}
{$vm.vmgenid}	{$vm.vmstatestorage}	{$vm.watchdog}
{$vm.ha}	{$vm.status}	{$vm.vmid}
{$vm.clipboard}	{$vm.cpus}	{$vm.maxdisk}
{$vm.maxmem}	{$vm.pid}	{$vm.qmpstatus}
{$vm.running-machine}	{$vm.running-qemu}	{$vm.spice}
{$vm.uptime}

service- additional service data:

{$service.id}	{$service.userid}	{$service.orderid}
{$service.packageid}	{$service.server}	{$service.regdate}
{$service.domain}	{$service.paymentmethod}	{$service.qty}
{$service.firstpaymentamount}	{$service.amount}	{$service.billingcycle}
{$service.nextduedate}	{$service.nextinvoicedate}	{$service.termination_date}
{$service.completed_date}	{$service.domainstatus}	{$service.username}
{$service.notes}	{$service.subscriptionid}	{$service.promoid}
{$service.promocount}	{$service.suspendreason}	{$service.overideautosuspend}
{$service.overidesuspenduntill}	{$service.dedicatedip}	{$service.assignedips}
{$service.ns1}	{$service.ns2}	{$service.diskusage}
{$service.disklimit}	{$service.bwusage}	{$service.bwlimit}
{$service.lastupdate}	{$service.created_at}	{$service.updated_at}
{$service.domainPunycode}	{$service.password}

14. The 'Minimum Network Rate Limit' option allows you to change the previously entered 'Network Rate Limit' value to a new one if the current 'Bandwidth Limit' is already reached.
Note that the 'Bandwidth Limit' can also be used for the WHMCS overage billing calculation as described here.

15. 'Default Username Prefix' - when filling in this field you may use the {$serviceid} parameter to avoid problems with creating usernames that already exist.

16. You can easily import and assign any already existing VM from Proxmox to your WHMCS.

First, you need order Proxmox VPS product to your client account without processing the VM creation process.
Next, in the client's 'Products/Services' management tab of your admin area, fill the 'VMID' and 'Node' custom fields with the VMID of the virtual machine you want to import from your Proxmox server
Afterward, change the product status to 'Active' , save changes and use the 'Change User Role' module command.

17. It is possible to display more information about your VM in Proxmox Environment.
To do so, you need to provide the preferred records in the 'Container Notes' tab under the ' KVM or LXC Configuration' section.
The following records can be used:

Client: {$client_name} (ID: {$client_id}) 
Email: {$client_email} Service ID: {$service_id} 
Product: {$product_name} (ID: {$product_id})
Hostname: {$service_domain} 
Main IP: {$service_dedicated_ip} {if $service_assigned_ips} 
IP Address Allocation: {$service_assigned_ips} {/if}

You may also use markdown to modify the container notes, for example:

Client: {$client_name} (ID: {$client_id})\ 
Email: {$client_email}\
Service ID: {$service_id}\ 
Hostname: {$service_domain}\ 
Main IP: {$service_dedicated_ip} {if $service_assigned_ips}

The above notes will be displayed with every item starting in a new line.

18. When the interface names on the VM are Net\d+, you need to choose Eth\d+ in the 'Firewall' section of the product configuration.

19. If you want your clients to provide their own hostname, you need to add the following custom field in the 'Custom Fields' tab of the product configuration.

 proxmoxHostname|Hostname

20. Create Linux VM:

Create a VM template according to descriptions here
Move to Module Settings → Virtual Machine Configuration → OS Template, select the previously created template (e.g. Ubuntu)
In Module Settings → Cloud-Init: Cloud-Init: On, Service Username: On, Service Password: On

Place a new order, wait until all tasks in Proxmox Addon → Tasks have 'finished' status.

21. Create Windows VM:

Create a new virtual machine using an ISO image in Proxmox panel
Install Guest Agent on the windows system, read more here
Convert the created machine into a KVM template
Move to the product Module Settings → Guest Agent and switch options as below:

Module Settings → Virtual Machine Configuration: select the previously created Windows template under OS Template
Place a new order, wait until all tasks in Proxmox Addon → Tasks have 'finished' status.

22. Configuring 'Default User' per template. Move to 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Servers' → 'Server Details' → 'Templates' → 'Create/Edit Template'.

You may assign a default user to a single template, that user will be automatically assigned to the newly created VM.

23. Configurable option field: 'Storage Disc Space' - this option allows to define the type and space on disc via a configurable option when placing an order.
It also allows to extend the space as well as change the disc type. This CO overwrites the ordinary 'Disc Space' field available in the product configuration section.

Important: To migrate the disc, you must previously 'Stop' your VM.
Note: Values provided in configurable option must be integers.

24. Usage of VLAN Tags:

VLAN Tags Range Minimum and Maximum Numbers simply play the role of network separation measures. The minimum and maximum numbers cause the module to select the next free VLAN Tag from this range for each virtual machine it creates.
VLAN Tag is actually a drop-down list, and to select anything in this section, firstly, it is necessary to configure appropriate IP addresses in your Proxmox addon → IP Management section:

25. SDN Support:

The module supports SDN private network type. It is possible to create virtual networks (vnets) at datacenter level thanks to the Software Defined Network (SDN).
To learn all the details on SDN in proxmox, please navigate to the official proxmox documentation.

In the module, the whole configuration of SDN is located in 'Module Settings' → 'Private Network' section. There you will find dedicated options, these are:

Private Network Type
SDN Zone
SDN TAG Range Minimum Number
SDN TAG Range Maximum Number

26. The "fetchBackupsForArchive" parameter in the "global_options.yml" file allows skipping the backups from being loaded into the "Archive" list in the product configuration.

By default the parameter is set to 'true' and backups are loaded. You may change it manually to 'false' and no backups will be loaded in the 'Archive' dropdown list as on the screens below:

27. OS Templates and ISO Images' names - translate the names of available templates and images easily.
Add extra lines into the module language file (e.g. /yourWHMCS/modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/langs/english.php) with your desired translations to customize their names.

Follow the bellow pattern to add new lines:

$_LANG['template']['ISO_name'] = 'My ISO Name';

For example:

$_LANG['template']['Ubuntu'] = 'Ubuntu - preferred';
$_LANG['template']['Debian Live 9.4.0 Amd64 Cinnamon'] = 'Aktuelles Debian';

Please note that ['ISO_name'] must be replaced with the full template or image name that you are going to change.
As a result, the OS templates and ISO images names will be displayed in the language of your choice or with your custom name.

28. If you want to use the IP Address, CIDR and Gateway allocated from the IP Management section of the Proxmox Addon module instead of hard coding them, use the following parameter:

 {$ipv4Addresses[0].gateway}

29. Select the storage type already while placing the order.

Create the "Storage Disk Space" configurable option with storage size and name to allow clients to set "Storage Disk Space" during the order. It will be used instead of the provided "Disk Space" value.
For VE VPS KVM and LXC:

Resource Usage:
- Available resources
- Disc size
- Storage type

Exceptions:

if the "Linked Clone" option is selected in "Clone Mode" of the KVM configuration, the storage disk space will not work. (In the case of a linked template the KVM must have the same storage as the machine's main disk)

30. Private Network management

The module allows to create private network skipping the IP Management and firewall settings. Disable the below options if you do not aim to assign the IP address to the private network device.

'Assign IP Address Automatically' - option toggled by default; the IP Address is automatically assigned to a private network device
'Firewall on Private Network' - option toggled by default; the firewall is enabled on a private network device

31. How to Test Cloud Init in Proxmox Panel

If a Linux machine does not have a password or network configured, but the data is correctly sent to the Proxmox panel, check if Cloud Init is properly configured on the template.
To test this, set the password and user in the Proxmox panel’s Cloud Init section and clone the template. This will confirm if the password is applied correctly in the system.

[edit] Update Instructions

Essential guidance through the process of updating the module is offered here.

Please note that each time you update the module, you have to also update the files on the Proxmox server described in the step 4 of the installation guide.

Important: After upgrading the module to the newest version please first enter to the Proxmox addon in your WHMCS before setting up the product or opening it from admin or client area!
Otherwise, when you try to open the product's module settings, you may get SQLSTATE" "Base table or view not found" errors.

Please also note that since 2.7.0 module version the commands for the crons execution have slighty changed - although the old ones should still work, we recommend that you update their entries.

[edit] Upgrade Guide

Seeking a solution that offers greater flexibility, customization tailored to your precise needs, and unrestricted availability?
There is an option that not only proves to be cost-effective in the long run but also includes prioritized support services, making it a truly valuable investment.

Opt for the Open Source version of your Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module to unlock these benefits.
Simply click on either the Get Source Code or Upgrade To Lifetime button found on the product's page in our client area to complete the one-step upgrade process, with a dedicated discount already applied.

Follow a comprehensive guide covering the transition process, the advantages it brings, and step-by-step instructions on what to do next after the order has been successfully finalized.

[edit] Common Problems

1. When you have problems with connection, check whether your SELinux or firewall does not block ports.

2. Error 'Could not create PVE2_API object' during connecting via the noVNC console.

Reason: The user account does not have permission to access the noVNC console.
Solution: Proceed to the product's 'Module Settings' tab and check whether the selected user's permission grants access to the noVNC console.
Afterward, proceed to the client's hosting and run 'Change User Role' on it.

To change the user role for all clients, please use the 'Cron job users synchronization (run only once)' cron command.
You will find it in the 'Proxmox Addon' → 'General Settings'.

3. Error 'This connection is untrusted' during connecting via the noVNC console.

Reason: Your certificate is not valid.
Quick Solution: Your client needs to add the Proxmox address to the certificate exception list.
Best Solution: Configure a valid certificate.

4. The blank page during connecting via noVNC console, '501 Error' visible in the proxmox panel.

Reason: You have not uploaded the additional files on the Proxmox server.
Solution: Open 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' and upload content of the proper version on all Proxmox servers into the '/' path.

5. Error 'Change password failed: user 'xxx' does not exist'

Reason: You have not created a client yet.
Solution: When the PAM authentication is used, it is necessary to create a client first in order to change the password correctly. Read more about it here.

6. Error 'Function "ssh2_connect" does not exist. Please Install SSH2 PECL before you start using the script.'

Reason: You have not updated the php.ini file.
Solution: After SSH2 PECL installation, make sure that you have updated the php.ini files for CLI and webserver.

7. Once you have updated your Proxmox VPS For WHMCS to Proxmox VPS For WHMCS V2.0.0, it is always required to save your product configuration
in the module settings again.

8. The current disk usage for the KVM virtualization type is not properly displayed.
This is due to API limitations that lead to returning the incorrect value, which is always set to '0' .

9. If you want to use Cloud-Init on Debian, we recommend using the Cloud-Init's version 18.2 or later to avoid assorted problems occurring in previous versions.

10. Error: "Only root can set 'serial0' config".

Solution: Turn off the Xterms.js console in the product configuration.

11. Error "Parameter verification failed. ([maxfiles] - Only root may set this option.)"

Reason: The user is other than "root" or the server authentication is set to Proxmox VE.
Solution: In the server configuration, set the root details, and select PAM as the authentication type.

12. Error "Node for IP Address 10.10.10.10 not found"

Reason: An interface with the IP Address 10.10.10.10 cannot be found.
Solution: You need to provide your private IP Address node in the 'Assigned IP Addresses' field in the server configuration in your WHMCS.

13. Please remember that the disk size cannot be downgraded. Such a possibility is not supported.

14. Error: "Cannot clone to non-shared storage 'local"

Reason: Option 'Search For Templates On All Nodes' is enabled in the product configuration under KVM configuration.
Solution: Keep the above option disabled as shown on the screen.

Remember that cloning from node "A" to node "B" does not work on the local storage.
We do recommend using "Shared Storage" or creating the machine on the same node on which the KVM template is located.

It is important to keep every template named the same on every node, otherwise cloning will not work either, eg.:
node1: Ubuntu, CentOS, Debian
node2: Ubuntu, CentOS, Debian

15. Error: "Nameserver '%' cannot be resolved"

Reason: The nameserver IP must be provided for the virtual machine of LXC configuration type.
By default, the module uses the content provided by the client during order, eg. ns1, then WHMCS completes the nameserver with a domain.
If the nameserver field is left empty or the client orders a new domain, the system is not able to process the data correctly and create a full address.
Solution: Enable the 'Use Server Nameservers' option in the product's configuration or manually correct the nameserver per the order.

16. Error: "SQLSTATE[42S02]: Base table or view not found: Table 'ProxmoxAddon_ServerUsage' doesn't exist"

Reason: The ProxmoxAddon_ServerUsage table has not been created properly because the tblservers table is on a different engine than "InnoDB"
Solution: Change the engine to "InnoDB", deactivate the proxmox addon and then activate it again. The missing table will be created.

17. The Move Product/Service action is not supported by the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module.
This is due to WHMCS limitations, and the fact that there are no hooks that would allow to catch such an event.

18. Error: "([boot] - invalid format - format error boot.order: invalid format - invalid boot device 'c')"

Solution: Edit the boot order in any of the templates to ensure the boot order is saved in a new format (after the change you may go back to the previous order)

19. In case you encounter any problems with the 'Guest Agent', please first ensure that the service is active in the machine's operating system.

You may use the following command in PowerShell to check the status:

 Get-Service QEMU-GA

To restart the service (stop and start again) use the following command:

 Restart-Service QEMU-GA

20. Error: "SQLSTATE[HY000] [2002] php_network_getaddresses: getaddrinfo for proxydb failed: Temporary failure in name resolution"

Solution: Make sure there are no old volumes or duplicate .env files present.

KVM	LXC
The number of CPU sockets\|CPU Sockets	cores\|CPU Cores
The number of cores per socket\|CPU Cores	cpulimit\|Limit Of CPU
cpulimit\|Limit Of CPU	CPU units for a VM\|CPU Units For The VM
CPU weight for a VM\|CPU Units For The VM	Amount of RAM\|Amount Of RAM
Amount of RAM\|Amount Of RAM	Amount of SWAP\|Amount Of SWAP
Disk Space\|Disk Space	Disk Space\|Disk Space
additionalDisksSpace\|Additional Disks Space	additionalDisksSpace\|Additional Disks Space
additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]\|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]	additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]\|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]
IP Addresses\|IPv4 Addresses	IP Addresses\|IPv4 Addresses
IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Addresses	IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Addresses
IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Subnets	IPv6 Addresses\|IPv6 Subnets
privateNetwork\|Private Network	privateNetwork\|Private Network
Backups Limit\|Backups Size	Backups Limit\|Backups Size
Backups Files Limit\|Backup Files	Backups Files Limit\|Backup Files
backupProtectedFiles\|Protected Backup Files	backupProtectedFiles\|Protected Backup Files
snapshots\|Snapshots	snapshots\|Snapshots
snapshotJobs\|Snapshot Jobs	snapshotJobs\|Snapshot Jobs
Bandwidth\|Bandwidth	Bandwidth\|Bandwidth
VM Template\|VM Template	VM Template\|VM Template
archive\|Archive	archive\|Archive
Network Rate\|Network Rate	Network Rate\|Network Rate
vcpus\|VCPUs	tag\|Tag
ISO Image\|ISO Image	storage\|Storage Disk Space
osType\|OS Type
cicustom\|Custom Cloud-Init Configuration
ciscript\|Cloud-Init Script
tag\|Tag
storage\|Storage Disk Space

@@ Line 1: / Line 1: @@
-<meta name="keywords" content="proxmox vps for whmcs, proxmox vps configuration, whmcs proxmox vps management, whmcs proxmox vps installation, whmcs proxmox vps common problems, about whmcs proxmox vps, whmcs proxmox vps documentation, whmcs proxmox vps faq, whmcs proxmox vps help, whmcs proxmox vps guide, whmcs proxmox vps wiki, whmcs proxmox vps tutorial, whmcs proxmox vps tips, whmcs proxmox vps wiki"></meta>
+<meta name="keywords" content="proxmox ve vps for whmcs, proxmox ve vps configuration, whmcs proxmox ve vps management, whmcs proxmox ve vps installation, whmcs proxmox ve vps common problems, about whmcs proxmox ve vps, whmcs proxmox ve vps documentation, whmcs proxmox ve vps faq, whmcs proxmox ve vps help, whmcs proxmox ve vps guide, whmcs proxmox ve vps wiki, whmcs proxmox ve vps tutorial, whmcs proxmox ve vps tips, whmcs proxmox ve vps wiki, proxmox vps whmcs module, proxmox virtual environment whmcs"></meta>
-<meta name="description" content="ModulesGarden Wiki Contains All The Information You Need About The Proxmox VPS For WHMCS Module."></meta>
+<meta name="description" content="ModulesGarden Wiki Contains All The Information You Need About The Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS Module."></meta>
-=About [http://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox_vps/features Proxmox Module For WHMCS]=
+=About [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS]=
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 10px 0px;"|'''eNom Email For WHMCS'''  is a fully featured addon module created in order to facilitate management of cPanel. <br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 10px 0px;"|'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' is a powerful module which allows you to automatically provision virtual servers to your clients.<br/>
+Your customers will be able to manage virtual servers, backups, firewall, as well as access noVNC, SPICE, or Xterm.js console, and much more - all this directly in your WHMCS.<br/>
+Additionally, the module provides support for Cloud-Init for the KVM virtualization type, and lets you conveniently control all existing servers, IP addresses and clusters through the built-in Proxmox Addon.<br/><br/>
+ModulesGarden is official [https://www.proxmox.com/en/partners/all/partner/modulesgarden '''Proxmox Solution Partner'''] and this module is recommended by '''Proxmox Server Solutions GmbH.'''
+|}
+<!-- comment can fix everything -->
+*'''Admin Area Features:'''
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create/Suspend/Unsuspend/Terminate Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create/Terminate User Account
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Change Package - Supports Configurable Options
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Reconfigure Server Network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Boot/Reboot/Stop/Shutdown Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Change User Role
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Access noVNC, SPICE And Xterm.js Console
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Migrate Server Between Nodes In The Same Cluster
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Reinstall Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Change Server Hostname, ISO Image, Boot Devices And SSH Public Key
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Server Status, Details And Statistics
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Graphs - With Option To Change Time Scale of MRTG Graphs
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Display Disk And Bandwidth Usage Of Each Product
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Display CPU And Memory Usage Of Each Product
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Display IP Sets (KVM)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Auto Node - Automatically Create VM On Node With Most Free Space
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Client Area Features Per Product
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Network And Private Network Settings With SDN Support
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Import IP Address To Hosting IP Addresses Table
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Return IP Address To IP Addresses Subnet
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Add Additional IP Address To VM
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Add Additional Disks Storage To VM (KVM)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Enable Qemu Guest Agent (KVM)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Enable Backups Routing
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Enable Auto VM Backups Before Reinstallation
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Enable Load Balancer
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 30px;"|✔ Receive Notifications About VM Upgrades And Creation Failures
+|}
+*'''Proxmox Addon Features:'''
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Display Servers:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ List Per VPS And Cloud
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Clusters List
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ VMs List
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ KVM Templates
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Recovery VM Configurations List With Export To Backup File
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Task History
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Statuses, Resources Usage, IP Assignments And Details
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Manage Public And Private IP Addresses Per Server/VLAN/Tag/Node/Bridge:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv4 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Subnets
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Logs Of IP Assignment Changes
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ VM Cleaner - Manage VM Not Existing In Your WHMCS
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Convert KVM VPS To KVM Template
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Define VM IDs Ranges Per Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Set Minimum VM ID For Product Without ID Ranges Defined
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Provide Server Credentials For Cloud-Init Scripts
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Scheduled Backups, Firewall And Operating Systems Templates
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Resource Weights For Load Balancer Prioritization
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Tasks Repetition Threshold And Email Notifications
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Configure Console Proxy
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Synchronize Users Permissions
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 30px;"|✔ Create And Manage Custom Cloud-Init Scripts
+|}
+*'''Proxmox VE Widget'''
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Faulty VM Deployments
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Failed Tasks
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Cluster Remaining Resources
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 30px;"|✔ View Node Resources
+|}
+*'''Client Area Features:'''
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Server Status, Details And Statistics
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Boot/Reboot/Stop/Shut Down Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Reconfigure Server Network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Access noVNC, SPICE And Xterm.js Console
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Change Server Hostname, ISO Image, Boot Devices And SSH Public Key
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View And Edit Public SSH Key (KVM)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Download Public And Private SSH Keys (LXC)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create/Restore/Delete Backups Of Current Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Manage Backups Within Defined Limits (Max Number And Size Of Files)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Restore Backups From:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Any Owned Server
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Proxmox Backup Server (PBS)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Restore Backups Of:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Selected Single Files And Directories With Option To Download Them (PBS)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Full Server Backups
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Manage Backup Schedules Within Defined Limits (Max Number And Size Of Files)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Protect Selected Backups From Manual Deletion And Backups Routing
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Add And Manage Additional Disks
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Manage Firewall Rules And Options
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Resources Usage Graphs - With Option To Change Time Scale of MRTG Graphs:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Memory
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Network Traffic
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Disk I/O
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Network Devices, Manage Private Interface And Attach Servers
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Reinstall Server Using Templates (KVM) And ISO Images
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Send Email Notifications When Server Exceeds Resources Thresholds:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Network Traffic
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU Usage
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Memory Usage
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Disk Read And Write Speed
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create Server Snapshots:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Manually
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Automatically:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 60px;"|✔ Every Number Of Hours
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 60px;"|✔ Each Specified Days
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ View Tasks History
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Manage VM Power Tasks To Automatically Start/Stop/Reboot Server At Specified Time
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Display CPU, Memory, Disk And Bandwidth Usage
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 30px;"|✔ Choose Server Resources While Ordering And Upgrade/Downgrade Them Freely
+|}
+*'''Configurable Options:'''
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ '''KVM''':
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Number Of CPU Sockets
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Number Of Cores Per Socket
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU Units For The VM
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Amount of RAM
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Disk Space
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Additional Disk Space (With Configurable Storage, Units And Size):
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv4 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Subnets
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Private Network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Backups Size Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Backups Files Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Snapshots Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Snapshot Jobs
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Bandwidth Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ VM Template
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Archive
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Network Rate
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ VCPUs
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ ISO Image
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ OS Type
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Custom Cloud-Init Configuration
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Cloud-Init Script
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 45px;"|✔ Tag
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 5px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ '''LXC''':
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Number Of CPU Cores
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ CPU Units For The VM
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Amount of RAM
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Amount of SWAP
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Disk Space
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Additional Disk Space (With Configurable Storage, Units And Size):
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv4 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Addresses
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ IPv6 Subnets
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Private Network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Backups Size Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Backups Files Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Snapshots Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Snapshot Jobs
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Bandwidth Limit
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ VM Template
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Archive
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 45px;"|✔ Network Rate
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 45px;"|✔ Tag
+|}
-It allows your customers to manage their mailboxes without even accessing eNom Email!<br />
+*'''General Info:'''
-This is a fantastic time saving and convenience!
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports Cloud-Init (KVM)
 |}
-*'''Features:'''
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create Account
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports PVE And PAM Authentication
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Terminate Account
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports KVM And LXC Virtualization
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Renew Account
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports Proxy For Proxmox Console Connections
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Change/Reset Password
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Integrated With [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/advanced-billing Advanced Billing For WHMCS] - Actual Server Resource Usage Billing
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Create/Remove Mailbox
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Integrated With [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/ip-manager IP Manager For WHMCS] - Complete Control And Easy Assignment Of IP Subnets (LXC)
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 30px;"|✔ Log In To Webmail
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Integrated With [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/products-reseller Products Reseller For WHMCS] - End-To-End Solution For Products And Servers Reselling
 |}
-*'''Additionally:'''
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 30px;"|✔ Supports WHMCS V5 and Later
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Integrated With [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-cloud-vps Proxmox VE Cloud VPS For WHMCS] - Multiple Servers Provisioning And Management Within Set Resource Limits
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Integrated With [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/server-allocator Server Allocator For WHMCS] - Automatic Assignment Of Most Suitable Servers To Products
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Fully Integrated With [https://lagom.rsstudio.net/extensions/whmcs-modules-integration/proxmox-ve-vps-by-modulesgarden Lagom WHMCS Client Theme]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Multi-Language Support
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports Proxmox VE 6.X, 7.X And 8.X
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports IPv4 And IPv6
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports PHP 8.2 Back To PHP 7.4
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports WHMCS Themes "Six" And "Twenty-One"
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Supports WHMCS V8.11 Back To WHMCS V8.8
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 30px;"|✔ Requires ionCube Loader V13 Or Later
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 30px;"|✔ Easy [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/How_To_Upgrade_WHMCS_Module Module Upgrade] To [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps#open-source-version Open Source Version]
 |}
 =Installation and Configuration=
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 0px;"|'''This tutorial will show you how to successfully install and configure Proxmox VPS For WHMCS.''' <br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''This tutorial will show you how to successfully install and configure [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS.]''' <br />
-We will guide you step by step through the whole installation and configuration process.
+We will guide you step by step through the whole installation and configuration process.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' If you are still using any of the module's previous versions '''prior to v2.7.0''', [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Proxmox_VPS_2.X_For_WHMCS follow these instructions].''
 |}
 ==Installation==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''1. Log in to your client area and download Proxmox VPS For WHMCS.'''
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 0px;"|'''This tutorial will show you how to successfully install and configure [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS.]''' <br />
+We will guide you step by step through the whole installation and configuration process.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX1.png]]
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''1. Log in to our client area and download the module.'''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''2. Upload and extract the module into the main WHMCS directory.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_1.png]]
 |}
+<!--
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''2. In the downloaded file you might find one or two packages that support different PHP versions.'''<br/>
+In the most recent versions of the module, you will find only one package that supports PHP 7.4 and later.<br/> <!-- If you need a package for the previous versions of PHP, please [https://www.modulesgarden.com/support/ticket/general-support contact our support].
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 15px;"|'''3. When you install Proxmox VPS for the first time you have to rename '' 'license_RENAME.php' '' file.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PHP74_81.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|File is located at '' 'modules/servers/enomEmail/license_RENAME.php' ''. Rename it from '' 'license_RENAME.php' '' to '' 'license.php' ''.
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"| '' '''Important''': This situation does not affect [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps#open-source-version '''the open source version'''] of this module which can be applied to any PHP from version 5.6 and later.''<br/>'' '''Note''': You can check the current PHP version in your WHMCS. To do so, proceed to ''' 'Utilities' → 'System' → 'PHP Info'.'''
 |}
+-->
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''2. Extract the package and upload the '' 'includes' '' and '' 'modules' '' folders into the main WHMCS directory.
+The content of the package to upload should look like this.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 0px 15px;"|'''4. In order to configure your license key, you have to edit a previously renamed '' 'license.php' '' file.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_2_1.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Enter your licence key between quotation marks as presented on the following screen.<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px; color: #ff0000;"|'''Warning: The next step is important, make sure you do not skip it!''' <br/>
-You can find your license key at your client area → '' 'My Products' ''.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX4.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''3. Open '' 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' '' and upload the content of the proper version on all Proxmox Virtual Environment servers into the '' '/' '' path.'''<br />You should upload these files '''not only during the first installation of the module but also each time you update it.'''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''5. Firstly we should activate Proxmox addon module.''' <br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|
-To do so, log in into your WHMCS. Press '' 'Setup' → 'Addon Modules' ''.<br />
+'''''Note 1:''' If the version of the Proxmox server you are using is not available, choose the package with the '''highest version number that is lower than the one you are currently using.'''''  <br/> '''''Note 2:''' If you wish to allow noVNC consoles, you need to configure a product using the PVE realm and set user permissions to 'PVEVMUser.' '''''<br/>
-Find'' 'Proxmox Addon' ''and press'' 'Activate' ''.
+'''''Important:''' Open Folder UploadOnProxmoxServer/5.2-10 and upload content on all your proxmox servers. Scripts must be updated on proxmox server v2.6.0 to allow Xterm.js console work.''
 |}
-==Activation of Addon Module==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX5.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''4. When you install Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS for the first time, you have to rename the '' 'license_RENAME.php' '' file.'''<br />
+The file is located in '' 'modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/license_RENAME.php'. '' Rename it from '' 'license_RENAME.php' '' to '' 'license.php'. ''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''6. Click'' 'Configure' ''. ''' <br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_3.png]]
-Mark '' 'Full Administrator' ''checkbox and press on '' 'Save Changes' '' button.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX6.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''5. In order to configure your license key, you have to edit the previously renamed '' 'license.php' '' file.'''<br />
+Enter your license key between the quotation marks as presented on the following screen.<br />
+You can find your license key in our client area → '' 'My Products'. ''
 |}
-==Configuration of Server==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''7. Now we will show you how to configure a new product.''' <br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_4.png]]
-Go to'' 'Setup' → 'Products/Services' → 'Servers' ''.<br />
-Afterwards press '' 'Add New Server' ''.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX7.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''6. In the next step, set up the '' 'storage' '' folder as recursively writable.'''<br />
+This folder is available at '''two''' locations:
+# '' your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/ ''
+# '' your_whmcs/modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/ ''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''8. Next, enter your server name, IP address, username and password. Choose '' 'Proxmox VPS' '' from a dropdown menu and press '' 'Save Changes' ''.'''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_4_1.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX8.png]]
+|style="color: #ff0000; padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''Important: Beta to Stable Release update:'''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''9. After you configure your server correctly, you will see a following screen. ''' <br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''7. If you are upgrading your module from beta to a stable release module version please either:'''
-You can check connection with Proxmox server, simply press'' 'Test Connection' '' as shown on screen below.
+* delete the ''"ProxmoxAddon_Backups"'' table from the database manually, then deactivate and activate the module in '' 'Addon Modules' ''
+* enter the below command in phpMyAdmin:
+ ALTER TABLE `ProxmoxAddon_Backups` ADD `format` VARCHAR(40) NOT NULL AFTER `volid`;
 |}
+==Activation of Proxmox Addon==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX9.png]]
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''9. Firstly, activate the Proxmox Addon.''' <br />
+To do so, log in to your WHMCS and navigate to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Addon Modules'. '' Find '' 'Proxmox Addon' '' and press '' 'Activate'. ''<br/><br/>
+'' '''Note:''' The Proxmox addon version might not match the current version of the provisioning module itself. This is completely normal due to the specific structure of the module.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''10. It is time to create server group, to do so click on '' 'Create Server Group' ''.
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_5.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX10.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''10. In the next step, you need to permit access to this module.'''<br />
+To do so, click on the '' 'Configure' '' button, tick '' 'Full Administrator' '' and press '' 'Save Changes'. ''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''11. Enter name, click on your previously created server, press '' 'Add' '' and afterwards'' 'Save Changes' ''. '''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_6.png]]
 |}
+==Configuration of Server==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX11.png]]
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''11. Now, we will show you how to configure a new product.''' <br />
+Go to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Servers' '' and press the '' 'Add New Server' '' button.
 |}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''12. Next, enter your server name and IP address, you may add any port in the following format: '' "IpAddress:Port" '', that is: ''10.10.10.1:8006'''''.<br />
+Enter the and password, choose the authentication type from '' 'Authentication' '' and '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' from the '' 'Type' '' dropdown menus. Save changes afterward.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' If you have problems with connection, make sure the WHMCS server can correctly connect to Proxmox. For more details refer to this article [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Proxmox_VE_API#Example:_Get_a_New_Ticket_and_the_CSRF_Prevention_Token|article].''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_8.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''13. Time to create a server group. To do so, click on '' 'Create Server Group'. ''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_9.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''14. Enter the name, click on your previously created server, press '' 'Add' '' and afterward '' 'Save Changes'. '''''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_11.png]]
+|}
 ==Configuration of Product==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''12. In order to create and configure product click on '' 'Setup' → 'Products/Services' → 'Products/Services' ''.'''<br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''15. In order to create and configure a product, go to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Products/Services' ''. '''<br />
-Click on '' 'Create a New Group' ''.
+Click on '' 'Create a New Group'.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX12.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_12.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''13. Enter product group name and press '' 'Save Changes' ''.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''16. Enter a product group name and press '' 'Save Changes'. '''''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX13.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_13.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''14. When you have a product group, you can create your product. '''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''17. When you have a product group, you can assign your product to it.'''<br />
-To create a product click on '' 'Create a New Product' ''.
+To create a product, click on '' 'Create a New Product'.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX14.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_14.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''15.  Afterwards choose your product group from a dropdown menu, enter your product name and press '' 'Continue' ''.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''18.  Afterward, choose your product group from dropdown menus and point its type, enter your product name and choose Proxmox VE VPS as a module name. <br/> Press '' 'Continue'. '''''<br />
+'' 'Product Type' '' can be set to '' 'Server/VPS' '' but nameservers will need to be added later ([https://requests.whmcs.com/topic/ability-to-remove-the-nameserver-options-on-order-page here] you can find instructions on how to remove them from your order template).<br/>
+'' 'Server/VPS' '' type can also be useful for a more complex display of IP addresses assignment. However, if this is not something you need, you can select '' 'Shared Hosting' ''.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX15.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_15.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''16. Now go to '' 'Module Settings' '' section, choose both 'Proxmox VPS' and your previously created server group from a dropdown menus<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''19. Now, go to the '' 'Module Settings' '' section and choose your previously created server group from the dropdown menu.'''<br />
-Click on '' 'Save Changes' ''.'''
+The page should reload automatically after the selection. If it doesn't, you may need to click '' 'Save Changes' ''.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX16.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_16.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''17. From a dropdown menus choose '' 'Virtualization Type' '', '' 'Default Node' '' and '' 'Template & ISO Storage' ''. '''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''20. Choose '' 'Virtualization Type' '' and '' 'Default Node' '' from the dropdown menus, and define whether the available resources should be checked before creating a new machine.'''<br />
-Press '' 'Save Changes' ''.
+Available virtualization types:
+*'''KVM''' - short form for Kernel-based virtual machines; used for Qemu (Quick Emulator) which is an open source hypervisor that emulates a physical computer
+*'''LXC''' - used for Linux Container as a lightweight alternative to fully virtualized virtual machines
+Remember that changing the node will always result in the replacement of the current configuration with the default one. Upon selecting the node, the current configuration should be saved automatically.<br/>
+If, for any reason, this does not happen, please press '' 'Save Changes'.''<br />
+'''''Note:''' If you choose the 'Auto-Node' as your 'Default Node', new virtual servers will be created on the least used node.''<br/>
+'''''Note 2:''' An advanced tool is available for you to automatically manage the node selection with the best amount of resources. Read more about [[#Load Balancer|Load Balancer]].''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX17.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_17.png]]
 |}
+===KVM Virtualization Type===
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''18. Setting of KVM virtualization type. (skip it if you choosen OpenVZ virtualization type)'''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''21. Setting the KVM virtualization type.'''<br />
-From a dropdown menus choose '' 'KVM OS Type' '', '' 'Storage' '','' 'Disk Type' '', '' 'CD/DVD-ROM Type' '',<br />
-'' 'ISO Image' '', '' 'Network Mode' '', '' 'Network Model' '' and '' 'Bridge' ''.<br />
+Before you start configuring the KVM virtualization, we '''highly recommend''' that you familiarize yourself with the following '[https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Qemu/KVM_Virtual_Machines Qemu/KVM Virtual Machines]' Proxmox Virtual Environment wiki article.
-Type your VM description in'' 'Container Description' ''and click'' 'Save Changes' ''.
+Since the 2.7.0 module version, '''the basic fields''' required to create a virtual machine are '''filled in by default''' to make the initial setup simpler for you.<br />
+Additionally, only the fields that require the administrator's initial attention are '''expanded''' by default, while all panel sections with '''advanced settings''' are '''collapsed'''.<br />
+Start your product configuration in the '' 'Virtual Machine Configuration' '' panel, where you can set up such features as the used OS Template or Archive, machine resources and limits or assigned IP addresses. <br/> Note that some fields can be left empty if you want to disable them or set as unlimited - read the tooltips for further guidance. <br/>
+'''''Note:''' When creating a virtual machine (VM) from an OS template, the module automatically deletes network interfaces and creates new ones based on the product configuration.''<br/>
+'''''Note 1:''' If you want to create the VM based on '' 'Archive' ''of the backup copy,  remember to leave the 'OS Template' field empty.''<br/>
+'''''Note 2:''' To turn off loading archives, see section: [[#Tips|Tips, point 26]].''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX18.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_18.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''19. Setting of OpenVZ virtualization type. (skip it if you choosen KVM virtualization type) '''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Next, configure '' 'Network', 'Hard Disk', 'Backup' '' and so on. For KVM virtualization type, there is also the '' 'Guest Agent' '' section available.<br/>
-From a dropdown menus choose '' 'OpenVZ OS Template' ''and'' 'Target Storage' ''.<br />
-Type your VM description in'' 'Container Description' ''and press '' 'Save Changes' ''.
+Guest Agent is used to exchange information between the virtualization server and the operating system of your virtual machine.<br/> Thanks to this, additional commands such as setting IP addresses and the user’s password can be executed in the guest system.<br/>
+The '' 'Service Password', '' '' 'Service Hostname' '' and '' 'Configure Network' '' options work with Windows OS only.<br/> If enabled, while creating a VM, the Guest Agent will set up the user’s hostname and password and configure the network automatically. <br/>
+* '' 'Guest Trim'' ' -  enable and the guest-trim will be run after moving the disk or migrating the VM <br/>
+* '' 'FileSystems Freeze during Backup' '' - enable to allow freezing/thawing of guest filesystems during backup for consistency <br/>
+Remember that you need to install Guest Agent on your KVM template in order for the function to work properly. For more info click [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Qemu-guest-agent here]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX19.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_18_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Other panels that are less important or require more knowledge can be expanded according to your needs by clicking on the arrow on the right.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_19.png]]
+|}
+<div id="Client_Area_Features"></div>
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Finally, choose which client area features shall be available in the client area. Enable the '' 'Managed View' '' feature to make all virtual machine management options and actions visible to the administrator and hidden from the client.<br/>Do not forget to check out the [[#Finalizing_The_Configuration|Finalizing The Configuration]] chapter. <br/>Other practical information on the product configuration can be also found in the further sections of this documentation.<br/>
+Save settings when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_20.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|'' '''Important:''' Keep in mind that the '''root password''' is by default generated automatically for the KVM virtualization upon its creation and reset.'''<br />''
+''If you want to set your own password on the KVM virtualization, use the [[#Cloud-Init_.28KVM.29|Cloud-Init]] feature.''
+|}
+===LXC Virtualization Type===
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''22. Setting the LXC virtualization type is very similar to KVM.'''<br/>
+Before you start configuring the LXC virtualization, we '''highly recommend''' that you familiarize yourself with the following '[https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Linux_Container Linux Container]' Proxmox wiki article.
+Just as with [[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|KVM]], '''the basic fields''' required to create a virtual machine are '''filled in by default''' since the 2.7.0 module version to make the initial setup simpler for you.<br />
+Additionally, only the fields that require the administrator's initial attention are '''expanded''' by default, while all panel sections with '''advanced settings''' are '''collapsed'''.<br />
+Start your product configuration in the '' 'Virtual Machine Configuration' '' panel, where you can set up such features as 'Default Storage', used 'OS Template' or 'Archive', container resources and limits or the number of assigned IP addresses. <br/> Note that some fields can be left empty if you want to disable them or set as unlimited - read the tooltips for more information. <br/>
+'''''Note:''' If you want to create the VM based on '' 'Archive' ''of the backup copy,  remember to leave the 'OS Template' field empty.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_21.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Next, configure '' 'Mount Point', 'Backup', 'Network' '' and so on.<br/>
+Other panels that are less important or require more knowledge can be expanded according to your needs by clicking on the arrow on the right.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_19_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Finally, choose which client area features will be available in the client area. Enable the '' 'Managed View' '' feature to make all virtual machine management options and actions visible to the administrator and hidden from the client.<br/>Do not forget to check out the [[#Finalizing_The_Configuration|Finalizing The Configuration]] chapter. <br/>Other practical information on the product configuration can be also found in the further sections of this documentation.<br/>
+Save settings when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_22.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|'' '''Important:''' The LXC virtualization type is supported only by '''Proxmox VE 4.0. and later'''. <br/>If you use any previous version of a Proxmox server, you will not be able to start this virtualization.''
+|}
+===Finalizing The Configuration===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''23. Afterward, you can create configurable options. '''<br/>
+This step is <u>optional</u> - if you want to take it, start by selecting which of the configurable options listed in [[#List of Configurable Options|this table]] you want to generate.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' It is advisable not to generate options that you do not plan to use, or in case you want their fixed values to be taken from the module settings, rather than being flexible.<br/> Moreover, the configurable options differ between the KVM and LXC virtualization types, so create them separately if needed.''
+'''''Note 2:''' There is also an 'Alternative Mode' available, which changes the way the configurable options values are verified and calculated. <br/> Select single configurable options and their values will be summed with the default product configuration values instead of overwriting them.''
+More information about configurable options and their edition can be found [https://docs.whmcs.com/Addons_and_Configurable_Options here].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_23_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_23.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''24. At the end of the product configuration, you have to add a cron job as shown below (5-minute intervals are recommended).
+ php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php queue
+Do not forget to replace '' 'your_whmcs' '' with your WHMCS root location. The cron can be also executed every single minute in order to perform the action more often.<br/>
+In the [[#Configuration_of_Addon|Configuration of Addon]] settings, you will find a personalized command for the cron on your server as well as more possible crons to set up for execution.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''You have just finished the installation and configuration of the product, congratulations! Be sure to follow the below addon configuration as well to learn how to set up additional features. '''
 |}
 ==Configuration of Addon==
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 25px;"|'''20.Adding new IP address'''<br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''25. Proceed to '' 'Addons' '' → '' 'Proxmox Addon' '' → '' 'Settings' '' → '' 'General Settings' '' and set up cron jobs listed under the '' 'Cron' '' section.<br/>
-In order to create new product you have to add product'' 'Dedicated IP'' ' to '' 'IP Addresses' '' list in Proxmox addon module.<br />
+Please note there are separate cron jobs dedicated to Proxmox VPS and Proxmox Cloud VPS, crucial for the seamless operation of the modules. Their suggested frequency is 5 minutes.<br/> If you use only one of the Proxmox products, there is no need to set up separate cron jobs.<br/>
-To do so, go to'' 'Addons'→'Proxmox Addon'→'IP Management' ''and press '' 'Add Pool' ''.
+The other cron jobs are responsible for:
+* Backups  synchronization ''(every 5 minutes suggested)'' '''Important: required since version 3.7.0!'''
+* Users synchronization ''(run once only)''
+* VM recovery synchronization ''(every 5 minutes suggested)''
+* VM migration synchronization ''(every 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Tasks synchronization ''(every 5 minutes suggested)''
+* VM power tasks ''(optional, each 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Resource notifications ''(optional, each 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Updating the server usage ''(each 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Removing backups ''(each 24 hours suggested)''
+* Scheduled backups ''(optional, each 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Backup tasks migration to scheduled backups ''(optional, run only once per product)''<br/>You can find information on how to run this cron in the [[#Backup_Schedules|Backup Schedules]] section.
+* Snapshot jobs ''(optional, each 5 minutes suggested)''
+* Removing snapshots ''(optional, each 24 hours suggested)''
+* VM names synchronization ''(run only once)''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX20.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_35.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 25px;"|'''21. Type desired IP in'' 'IP Pool' '' and choose server from'' 'Server:' ''dropdown menu.<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''26. Next, find the '' 'Minimum VMID' '' field under the 'Cron' settings.'''<br/> Fill it in with a number that will be used as an ID of the first VM, the second VM will be assigned the next ID number.<br/> Define the limit of tasks that will be executed with a single cron run, just type in the required number into the '' 'Tasks Limit' '' field.<br/>
-Afterwards press'' 'Add Pool' ''.
+Here, you may also turn on the '' 'Debug Mode' '' if you need to register module logs.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX21.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2__35_1.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 25px;"|'''22. You are now able to create new product using previously added IP address.'''<br />
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''27. Adding a new IP address (applicable only if you do not use [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/ip-manager#features IP Manager For WHMCS]).'''<br />
-If you used KVM virtualization type client area of successfully created producs should look simillar as on the screen below.
+In order to create a new product with an IP address assigned, you have to add '' 'Dedicated IP'' ' to the '' 'IP Addresses' '' list in '' 'Proxmox' '' addon module.<br />
+To do so, go to '' 'IP Management' '' and press '' 'New IP Addresses'. ''<br />
+'''''Note:''' You can add IPv4, IPv6 addresses and IPv6 subnets. The process is the same for all types.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX22.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_30.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|'''23. Client area of product using OpenVZ virtualization type look quite similar.
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''28. Start with defining the IP address type, choose among: '' 'IPv4', IPv6' '' and '' 'IPv6 subnet'.'' '''<br/>
+Then, depending on the selected type, provide: <br/>
+'''For IPv4 and IPv6 addresses types'''
+* "Network Address" ''(eg: 192.168.1.0/24)''
+* "Gateway"
+* "First IP Address" and "Last IP Address" - define the border '''from which and up to which''' of the IP address the generation ''(including the provided addresses)''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX23.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2__23.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|
+'''For "IPv6 Subnet" address type'''
+*"Network Address" ''(eg: 2a00:1911:5::/64)''
+*"Gateway"
+*'Number of Subnets"
+*"CIDR"
+*"First IP Address" and "Last IP Address" - define the border '''from which and up to which'''  of the IP address the generation ''(including the provided addresses)''
+Decide whether the created addresses will be private or not.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2__23_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Move to the '' 'Details' '' tab. Choose a server from the 'Server' dropdown menu and define which virtualization it should be applied to through selecting it from the 'Virtualization' dropdown menu.<br/>
+Remember to press the '' 'Confirm' '' button when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2__23_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''29. You are now able to create a new product using the previously added IP address.'''<br />
+If you are using the KVM virtualization type, the client area with a successfully created product should look similar to the one on the screen below.<br/>
+The assigned IP addresses should be displayed on the bottom panel according to the way you configured the IP pools. It looks quite similar in the case of the LXC virtualization type product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_24.png]]
+|}
+==[https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Proxmox_Proxy_Application Proxy] Installation For Console Connection==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''A comprehensive guide detailing the installation, update instructions, and operational flow for the Proxmox Proxy application can be found in a dedicated article accessible through the following [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Proxmox_Proxy_Application link].'''<br/>
+We encourage you to refer to it for further insight into the Proxmox Proxy application.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''The proxy feature can be looked on as an added security boost for your infrastructure.'''<br/>
+It hides your Proxmox server so that your clients will not get to know its actual address when connecting to the server via the console in your system.<br/>
+To work properly, the proxy must be accessible from both the public and private net as clients connect with the proxy from the public net, without the need to connect directly to proxmox.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''[https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Proxmox_Proxy_Application Proxy]''' must be '''connected with Proxomx server'''. To verify if the connection between these two is successful, you  may run the following command:
+  curl -v <nowiki>https://10.10.11.48:8006</nowiki>
+where 10.10.11.48:8006 is the '''node IP address'''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''Before you begin the process of connecting the console to the server through a proxy, you need to download the proxy application file.'''<br/>
+The file can be found under the following '''[https://www.modulesgarden.com/client-area/dl.php?type=d&id=5521 link]''' after you have logged in to your ModulesGarden account.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''1. Create a new VPS server, which you may run on a Proxmox server.'''<br/>
+It is advised to use the KVM virtualization type. <br/>
+<span style="color: Red">'' '''Warning!''' The used VPS may NOT have any services running, such as: PHP, WebServer (e.g. apache, nginx) or MySQL server.'' </span>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''2. Configure the network on the virtual machine, make sure the network works correctly, to do so you may use the below command:'''
+ ping modulesgarden.com
+If everything is fine, assure that basic server security settings have been established.<br/>
+You may turn off login with a password and turn on login with a key, change the SSH port, set up firewalls etc.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''3. Log into the machine on which you are going to set up proxy. '''
+|}
+{|'
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''4. Install the docker engine and the docker compose:'''
+''https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/''<br/>
+''https://docs.docker.com/compose/install/''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''5. Upload the application files into a proper directory, eg: ''/root/proxmox-proxy'' (create if needed).''' <br/>
+Then unzip the files.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''6. Move to the following catalog:'''
+ cd /root/proxmox-proxy
+Note that the exact directory depends on the previous step where you uploaded the files.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''7. Purchase or generate your own SSL certificate, and then use the certificate to overwrite the following files: '' 'nginx/localhost.crt' '' and '' 'nginx/localhost.key' ''. '''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''8. Find the '' 'example.env' '' file and rename it to '' '.env'.'' '''<br/>
+Then open the just renamed '' '.env' '' file and provide a random set of signs to create the database and root passwords: ''DB_PASSWORD'' and ''MYSQL_ROOT_PASSWORD'' <br/>
+These data will be automatically used when creating the database.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''9. Run the below command:'''<br/>
+ docker-compose up --build -d
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''10. Move to docker container:'''
+ docker exec -it proxyphp bash
+and run the installation script:
+ php -q /var/www/html/installer.php install
+When ready, find the API Key and keep it safe, you will need it later on when pasting the data into the ''Proxmox Addon'', see point 12 for details.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''11. Next, copy your machine IP address to WHMCS. You may check the IP address using the below command:'''
+ ip a
+'''''Note:''' Remember to check the IP address in your virtual machine, not in the proxyphp container.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''12. Configure all the required data in the Proxomox addon in your WHMCS.'''<br/>
+Move to  '' 'Addons' → 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Settings'.'' At the bottom you will find section '' 'Console Proxy' '' with '' 'Host' '' and '' 'API Key' '' fields.<br/>
+Note that the '''Host''' field may include either an '''IP address''' or a '''domain'''. It is extremely important that you paste here '''the same data as the ones used in the SSL certificate'''. <br/>The below screen shows an example with an IP address which is not the only correct possible option here.<br/>
+Provide the necessary data and confirm the changes.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_4_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''13. Make sure the server works. In order to do so, please open the address: ''<nowiki>https://{vmip}:8443</nowiki>''.'''<br/>
+Remember to replace ''{vmip}'' with a valid virtual machine IP address, for example: ''https://192.168.8.113:8443/''<br/>
+When you see ''{"errors":["Invalid API Endpoint"]}'' it means that the server correctly responds.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|'''14. Finally, try to open the noVNC console on your WHMCS Proxmox product to check if the proxy configuration is working properly.'''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''Important:''' If your certificate expires in the meantime, you will need to '''buy/generate''' a new one and follow the below steps:
+* move to the '''/root/proxmox-proxy'' catalog ''(the directory may differ depending on your setup)''
+* replace the '''nginx/localhost.crt''' and '''nginx/localhost.key''' files
+* run the following command:
+ docker-compose up --build -d
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''''Note:''' If you ever encounter an iconcube error while rerunning the 'docker-compose up' command, delete all local docker images related to your docker file using the following command and try again.''
+ $ docker rmi -f $(docker images -a -q)
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|For instruction on how to react in case an '''update is required''', please refer to the dedicated article including all details on the [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Proxmox_Proxy_Application Proxmox Proxy] application.
+|}
+==Cloud-Init (KVM)==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|Use Cloud-Init to configure the system during installation, first boot and package change. Cloud-Init was originally developed to provide early initialization of cloud instances.<br/>Click [https://access.redhat.com/documentation/en-us/red_hat_enterprise_linux_atomic_host/7/html/installation_and_configuration_guide/setting_up_cloud_init here] to learn more about the initial Cloud-Init configuration.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' Cloud-Init functionality is supported for the '''KVM''' virtualization only. <br/>
+|}
+<!-- Na razie bez tej notki
+<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' Cloud-init functionality is for '''KVM''' virtualization only and requires '''17.1 or higher''' version of cloud-init.''
+-->
+===Custom Configuration In Addon===
+====Cloud-Init Scripts====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The Cloud-Init Scripts section allows adding ready scripts that will be available to choose from in the products' configuration page.<br/> The selected there script will be used while crating the virtual machine.<br/>
+Press '' 'Add New' '' to manually add your script.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_50_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Name your new Cloud-Init script and type in or paste a ready configuration. The configuration must include:
+*Username
+*Hostname
+*Password
+Here is an exemplary configuration of a Cloud-Init script. You may alter it to fit your settings and paste into the '' 'Script' '' field:<br/>
+ #cloud-config
+ hostname: {$domain}
+ manage_etc_hosts: true
+ fqdn: {$domain}
+ user: {$username}
+ password: {$passwordHash}
+ chpasswd:
+   expire: False
+ users:
+   - default
+ package_upgrade: true
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_50_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|A full list of available variables related to a Proxmox VPS type of the product/service:
+ {$userid} {$serviceid} {$domain} {$username} {$password} {$passwordHash} {$cipasswordHash} {$model->dedicatedip} {$model->assignedips} {$customfields.sshkeys} {$ipv4Addresses} {$ipv6Addresses}
+Where:
+*''$model'' variables - stands for following [https://classdocs.whmcs.com/8.3/WHMCS/Service/Service.html services]
+*''$customfields'' variable - stands for all custom fields that exist in your service<br/>
+'''''Important:''' If you want to use a '''{} sign''' in your script that has '''no variable''' inside, you must place it inside: '''{literal}{/literal}''', for example: '{literal}{"X": "Y"}{/literal}'. <br/>Otherwise, errors will occur.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Manage created Cloud-Init scripts, edit/delete singe scripts or use mass action to delete numerous scripts.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_50_2.png]]
+|}
+====Server Details====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In order to use the Cloud-Init successfully, you need to also provide SSH details to let the script send the IP addresses to the Proxmox server.<br/>
+Move to ''Servers → Servers List → Details → Settings'', there you will find fields that are responsible for the correct SSH connection.
+*''SSH Host''
+*''SSH Port''
+*''SSH User''
+*''SSH Password'' or ''SSH Private Key''<br/>
+You also have to select the '' 'Snippet Storage' '' to locate the Cloud-Init script in the correct catalog.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_50_3.png]]
+|}
+===Configuration Of Product===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|To use Cloud-Init, you need to enable it in the configuration of the Proxmox product.<br/>
+Before you start, we '''highly recommend''' that you learn the details of Cloud-Init configuration on your Proxmox server first. Click [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Cloud-Init_Support here] for more information included directly in the Proxmox wiki article.<br/>
+Once you get familiar with Proxmox Cloud-Init, proceed to the Cloud-Init group of your KVM configuration where you can enable it as well as configure the following options:
+*'''Service Username''' - if enabled, the username for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, it will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template or taken from the '' 'Default User' '' field if provided.
+*'''Service Password''' - if enabled, the password for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, it will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template.
+*'''Service Nameservers''' - if enabled, the nameservers for the VM will be taken from the details of the WHMCS 'Products/Services' tab. Otherwise, they will remain unchanged and set by default as in the template.
+*'''DNS Domain''' - provide a DNS domain for the container. During VM creation, the setting from the host will be automatically used if neither a search domain nor a nameserver is set.
+*'''Default User''' - provide the username that will be used for the VM instead of using the '' 'Service Username' '' field or the default user of the configured image. Otherwise, leave empty.
+*'''Custom Cloud-Init Configuration''' - here you can optionally specify your [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Cloud-Init_Support#_custom_cloud_init_configuration custom config files] that will be used instead of the automatically generated ones.
+*'''Cloud-Init Script''' - you may also select one of your previously created in the addon scripts, it will be executed on VM creation or package change.
+*'''Storage''' - the directory on which the CD-ROM ISO image is stored
+*'''Template User''' - if enabled, the OS template first user will be used
+|}
+<!--
+*'''Cloud Init'''  -  select what scripts will be executed on VM creation or package change. If you are using the configurable options, you can also define the '' 'cloudInit|Cloud Init' '' option (Proxmox VPS only).<br/>'' '''Important:''' If you use multiple scripts configuration of the same type (e.g. 'Network Config'), remember that they will be connected into '''one script''' before being sent to the server.<br/>Therefore, make sure that these scrips work properly with each other.''
+*'''CD/DVD-ROM Type''' - an additional CD-ROM in which the ISO image is mounted with a ready-to-use script for the VM
+*'''Storage''' - the directory on which the CD-ROM ISO image is stored
+-->
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_51_new.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"| What is more, you can let your clients provide their own password to the VM when '' 'Cloud-init' '' is used.<br/> To do so, use the custom field that is presented below and do not forget to tick the '' 'Show on Order Form' '' option.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_51_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In addition, you can allow clients to enter their own public keys for the VM during the ordering process, so they can log in to the server using their private key instead of a password.<br/>To enable this function, go to the '' 'Custom Fields' '' tab and add a new '' 'sshkeys|SSH Public Key' '' field, select the '' 'Text Area' '' type and the '' 'Show on Order Form' '' checkbox.<br/>'' '''Note:''' This custom field is also auto-generated from the module settings, but with the 'Admin Only' option enabled. Remember to '''uncheck''' it in order to make this field visible to clients.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_51_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Now, when the client places a new order, they will be able to enter the public key here in the OpenSSH format.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_51_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The SSH public key can also be inserted once the order has been completed. Simply click on the '' 'Edit' '' icon on the product's '' 'Information' '' panel.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_52.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The public key can be entered right there in the OpenSSH format. It can be inserted from the admin area as well.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_53.png]]
+|}
+===Configuration Of Proxmox Server===
+<!--
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|1. 'genisoimage' is required for Cloud-Init to be installed on your '''Proxmox server'''. To proceed, execute the following command in the terminal:
+ apt-get update &&  apt-get install genisoimage
+Otherwise, you will get the '' 'genisoimage: command not found' '' error.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|2. To make the KVM virtual machine ready for Could-Init on a Proxmox server, complete the below steps:
+*Download and install the system ISO image, e.g. [https://www.ubuntu.com/download/alternative-downloads Ubuntu]
+*Install Cloud-Init by executing this command in the terminal: <pre>apt-get install cloud-init</pre>
+*The module requires the '' '''17.1 or higher''' '' version of Cloud-Init. After installation, you can validate the version using <pre>cloud-init -v</pre>
+*Shut down the machine and [http://git.mglocal/whmcs-products/Proxmox/uploads/994fd04f9a2a5cf03533c24aacfef0fc/image.png convert it to a template]
+*Finally, choose the created '' 'VM Template' ''from the product configuration or configurable options
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_57.png]]
+|}
+-->
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|The process of setting up Cloud-Init on the Proxmox server is described [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Cloud-Init_Support here].<br/>
+Additionally, you can use the following commands that can be useful for debugging purposes:
+*Re-run Cloud-Init scripts
+<pre>rm -rf /var/lib/cloud/sem/* /var/lib/cloud/instance /var/lib/cloud/instances/* &&
+cloud-init init  &&
+cloud-init modules -m final</pre>
+*Logs
+<pre>cat /var/log/cloud-init.log
+cat /var/log/cloud-init-output.log</pre>
+|}
+==Additional Storage Configuration==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|This is an extra option that allows for specifying additional parameters for additional disk drives.<br/> Check how to set the product to allow clients to add disks with desired space, storage type and speed within configured limits.<br/>
+Remember that the Additional Disks options in the module settings must be enabled.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|1. Start with creating new selections for the "Additional Disk Space" configurable option (additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disk Space), note that you have to do that manually.<br/>
+To create the configurable options, please remember to follow the below-presented pattern:
+ local-lvm:3 | Disk Local-LVM Storage: 3GB
+Where ''local-lvm:3'' cannot be modified, the name on the right can be freely adjusted and the unit changed.
+. Next, add an appropriate entry in the language file to display the configurable option in a user-friendly manner. Open the english.php file located in ''modules/servers/ProxmoxVPS/langs/english.php'' and find an empty string:
+ $_LANG['storage']['local'] = 'Local';
+ $_LANG['storage']['local-lvm'] = 'Local-lvm';
+Modify the configurable option name that is on the right from the '=' sign.
+. Consequently, clients are now given the option to add hard disk with the custom storage type.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_60.png]]
 |}
 =Management=
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|''' Proxmox VPS allows your customers to manage their PVE accounts via the client area in your WHMCS system.'''<br />
+At the same time, you can monitor and manage each product from your WHMCS admin area.
+|}
+==Admin Area==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the admin area, you are able to view details and manage your clients' machines, access remote consoles, migrate VMs between nodes, assign IP addresses and view resource usage graphs.<br /> All visible features can be turned on and off in the ''Proxmox Addon → Settings → [[#Admin_Area_Features|Admin Area Features]]''.
+# Firstly, there are the standard module commands that you can perform on the VM.
+# Among them, you will find actions to:
+## Manage the status of the machine,
+## Access to remote consoles
+## Migrate the server between nodes. <br/> You may enable '' 'Online' '' migration (no need to shut down the server before migration) and toggle '' 'Migration With Local Disks' '' which might take a while.
+# In this panel you will also find the basic information about the VM.
+# Moreover, you can change the VM hostname, ISO image, bootable devices as well as insert the SSH public key.
+'''''Note:''' The "Move Product/Service" action is not supported due to WHMCS limitations, and the fact that there are no hooks that would allow to catch such an event.''
+|}
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 0px;"|'''Proxmox VPS allows your customers to manage their PVE accounts via client area in your WHMCS system.'''
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_26.png]]
 |}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|It is possible to fetch information of network interfaces and OS using the 'Qemu Guest Agent' tool. <br/>
+This option must be previously enabled in the product configuration, and successfully installed on the VM. Afterward, it should look similar to the image below.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|In the next panel, you can find IPv4 and IPv6 addresses assigned to the VM.<br/> You can either delete or add an IP address to a product. To perform the latter action, press '' 'Add New IP' '' as shown on the following screen.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Fill in the fields to add a new IP address. At the bottom, there is a switcher '' 'Create Network''' which, when on, forces assigning this IP address via Cloud-Init if that has been enabled and configured properly. <br/>
+'''''Important:''' Create Network option works for KVM configuration only.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Additionally, until the VM has been provisioned, you can manually assign to it the desired IP addresses from the pool by typing them in the '' 'Assigned IPs' '' field (available for the '' 'Dedicated/VPS Server' '' product type).<br/>This will override the automatic IP address assignment, and the VM will use only the IP addresses you have entered in the mentioned field.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' The IP addresses you provide must already exist in the IP Management pool, and cannot be assigned to any other VM. This feature will not work if you already use the IP Manager For WHMCS module.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_27_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|In the next two panels, you can view IPSet information as well as reinstall the VM based either on the OS or ISO template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Graphs can be useful to monitor the usage of VM resources. You can change the interval by pressing the '' 'Edit' '' button, and simply providing a new one.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|In the last part of product management, you can view the user details on your Proxmox servers along with the assigned VMID, node, VLAN tag, and SSH public key provided before the VM creation.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_27_5.png]]
+|}
 ==Management of Addon==
+===Servers Management===
+====Servers List====
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 25px;"|In'' 'Addons'→'Proxmox Addon'→'Server List' you can find information about Proxmox servers you have configured.<br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In '' 'Addons' '' → '' 'Proxmox Addon' '' → '' 'Servers' '' → '' 'Servers List' '' you can find the configured Proxmox servers.<br />
-To see what product are created and assigned to your Proxmox server simply click on its'' 'Server Name' ''.
+'''RAM''' details:
+:Assigned - the RAM assigned to the server (hosting services only)
+:Total - the full server RAM
+:Free - the difference between the Total and Assigned values
+'''Suspended''' - the number of suspended accounts per size in MB ''E.g.: (1/500 MB) in case there is only one suspended account that takes up 500MB assigned to the Proxmox VPS server.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX24.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_28.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|As you can see on the screen below, you can find a lot of usefull information here.
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|Through pressing the '' 'Edit' '' icon, you will be moved to the server edit page - see point 10 of the [[#Configuration of Server|Server Configuration]].<br/>
+Press the '' 'More Details' '' icon, and you will obtain extended information on the selected server. Look below for more details.
 |}
+=====VMs=====
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX25.png]]
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"| The '' 'VMs' '' tab includes the list of virtual machines created on this server. Take a quick look at information on the domain, status, bandwidth, and IP addresses.<br/>
+To view information about the VM, simply press the "More Info" icon located on the right side of the page.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|In'' 'IP Management' '' tab you can add, edit and remove IP for Proxmox products.
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX26.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Check the node and VMID:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_29_1.png]]
 |}
-==Management of Proxmox VPS Interface==
+=====Clusters=====
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 25px;"|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"| The next tab contains the list of clusters with information on uptime, VMS and resource limits, as well as CPU, SWAP, memory and disk usage data.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' Limits defined in this section are taken into account by the [[#Load_Balancer|Load Balancer]] function. The Check Available Resources toggle is not affected by them.''
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX32.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29_2.png]]
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Press the "Edit" icon to manage the node and its limits.
+* Allow To Create VM - if enabled, a VM can be created on this node
+* Virtual Machines Number - define the maximum number of VM that can be created on this node
+* Maximum Number of CPUs - set the top limit of CPUs on this single node
+* Maximum Disk Size - set the top storage size allowed on this node
+* Maximum RAM Size - set the maximum amount of RAM allowed on this node
+* Default Storage - select the default storage for the VM created on this node<br/>
+Setting node limits is crucial as creating virtual machines is largely based on them, once reached, a new virtual machine cannot be created on that node.
 |}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Specify the 'Tasks Limit' here to set the maximum number of permitted backup tasks for the node you are currently modifying.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Please bear in mind that limits placed in the above section overwrite the "Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node" value defined in the ''Addon → Settings → Backup Tasks Limitation'' [[#Global_Limitations|section]].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29_4_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the last tab you may define the relation between the node and backup storage and their synchronization.
+* '' 'Backup Search Storages' '' -  here you are allowed to define which storages will be searched through while running "backupSynch" cron job for backup creation and restoration purposes.<br/> This setting overwrites the product settings.
+* '' 'Alternative Backup Storage' '' - if you run out of space on the storage, an alternative pointed here storage will be used to create and store the backup.<br/> You still can restore backup from the old storage, but only if that is selected in the above "Backup Search Storages" selection.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_29_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Press '' 'Node Details' '', and you will obtain all the summary and usage graphs:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_2.png]]
+|}
+=====VM Cleaner=====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|VM Cleaner allows you to track VMs existing only on your Proxmox server, and not in your WHMCS.<br/> Consequently, you are allowed to sort and delete only those VMs that cannot be managed in your WHMCS system.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_31_1.png]]
+|}
+=====Templates=====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|You can view the list of templates on this page. You can easily convert any '''KVM''' machine on your server to a template.<br />
+In order to convert a VM, press the '' 'Create Template' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_31_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Next, choose a VM that shall be converted.<br />
+Fill out the '' 'Description' '' field, and press '' 'confirm'. ''<br/>
+'''Important: The selected VM will be destroyed in the process.'''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_31_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|You may also delete unused templates here. Delete single templates or use the mass action feature to delete templates in bulk.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_31_2.png]]
+|}
+=====Server Settings=====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Here you can define the VM IDs range that will be used for newly created machines on this server. Please note that you need to enable the "Use VM Ranges" setting in the product configuration in order to use this feature.<br />To proceed, define the ID range and save changes. <br/>
+'''''Note:''' VM ID range allows you to sort created machines depending on the server they were created on''.<br/>
+'''SSH Data''' - fill out the SSH connection details ''(Host, User, Posrt, Password or Private Key)'' to allow to locate the IP addresses on the Proxmox server ''(Cloud-Init)''<br/>
+'''Snippet Storage''' - select the catalog where the file will be uploaded ''(Cloud-Init)''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_34.png]]
+|}
+=====Node Groups=====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Under the '' 'Node Groups' '' subsection, you can create new groups and assign nodes to them.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_34_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Provide a name of your group and allot preferred nodes from the dropdown menu.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_34_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Now, navigate to the '' 'Module Settings' '' of your product and find the '' 'Miscellaneous' '' and '' 'Load Balancer' '' sections.<br/> Firstly, provide the '' 'Minimum VMID' '' for a VM and then select one or more of the previously created groups.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_34_3.png]]
+|}
+====Services List====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In '' 'Addons' '' → '' 'Proxmox Addon' '' → '' 'Servers' '' → '' 'Services List' '' you can find details of any Proxmox product.<br />
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_35.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Press the '' 'More Details' '' button to preview the node and VMID information.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_35_1.png]]
+|}
+====Recovery VM Lists====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In '' 'Addons' '' → '' 'Proxmox Addon' '' → '' 'Servers' '' → '' 'Recovery VM List' '' you can view details of the created machine. <br />
+Run the '' 'VM recovery synchronization' '' cron job to create and store full backups of VM configuration - you can find it in the point 26 of the [[#Configuration of Addon|configuration]] instructions.<br/>
+Use the '' 'Export to File' '' button to save information in a TXT copy file.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_36.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Upon pressing the '' 'Details' '' icon, you will obtain the information on configuration, status, and DNS:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_36_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_36_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_36_3.png]]
+|}
+====Task History====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The "Task History" section includes the list of all module tasks with their most crucial details.<br/> You may delete single tasks or use the mass action button to remove them in bulk.<br/>
+Run the '' 'Tasks synchronization' '' cron job to synchronize the tasks, and view all tasks from the server - you can find it in the point 26 of the [[#Configuration of Addon|configuration]] instructions.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_37.png]]
+|}
+===IP Management===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the '' 'IP Management' '' tab, you can manage the IP addresses of Proxmox products.<br/> You can create both single IP addresses ''(IPv4 and IPv6 are supported)'', and IP pools which then can be assigned to created VMs.<br/>
+'''''Important!:''' In order to create a virtual machine, you must previously add '''public''' IP addresses. <br/> In case you do not own any public IP addresses in the database, you must previously enable the '''"cloud-init" '''option, only then it will be possible to create a VM with a '''private IP address'''.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_30.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|When you create a new IP address or a pool, you may define:
+*private/public address
+*servers or nodes that will use them
+*virtualization types ''(different VMs will use different IP pools)''
+'''''Note:''' please go back to point '''27''' of the [[#Configuration_of_Addon|addon configuration]] to learn more details about adding IP addresses.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_30_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_30_11.png]]
+|}
+====IP Logs====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The '' 'IP Logs' '' includes the history of the IP addresses that were removed by the admin and which are again available in the proxmox addon IP Management pool.<br/>
+Keep in mind that only addresses that were automatically added when creating the VM. Removed IP addresses, that were the manually assigned, are not logged here.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_30_0.png]]
+|}
+===IP Manager Integration===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Owing to the integration with [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/ip_manager/features IP Manager For WHMCS], you are able to easily create subnets with IP addresses, and assign them to the desired products.<br/>
+By activating the IP Manager submodule, settings concerning IP addresses such as 'Configurable Options' and 'Default Options' will be ignored by Proxmox VPS.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' This integration works for '''LXC''' and '''KVM''' virtualization types.''
+<br/><br/>
+. Proceed to the IP Manager For WHMCS → [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/IP_Manager_For_WHMCS#Subnets Subnets] tab in order to prepare the IP addresses subnet for Proxmox VPS For WHMCS.<br/>
+. Edit the previously created subnet, and create a custom field '' 'MAC Address' '' with a desired MAC address at each IP address in the subnet.<br/>
+''' ''Note:'' Setting up the MAC address is optional and can be skipped.'''<br/>
+More details about creating custom fields can be found [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/IP_Manager_For_WHMCS#Default_Custom_Fields here].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX_49.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|3. Afterward, create a [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/IP_Manager_For_WHMCS#IP_Manager_For_WHMCS#Configurations_and_Automatic_IP_Assignment new configuration], and assign the previously created subnet to it.<br />''Note: Multiple subnets can be assigned to a single configuration.''<br />
+. Now, link the configuration with Proxmox VPS product via a product, server or configurable option.<br />
+On the following screen, we have carried out the linking via a product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX_50.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|4. When Proxmox starts creating a virtual machine, it retrieves the assigned IP address to the service and assigns it directly to the virtual machine.<br/>
+It is possible to add '''VLAN Tag Custom Filed''' in the very same way as the "MAC Address" field.<br/>
+The only element you need to change is the custom field name, which should be ''' 'Tag' ''' in this case.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX_49_1.png]]
+|}
+===General Settings===
+====Load Balancer====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Load Balancer is an advanced tool that allows smooth rotation between nodes so as to find the most preferable one, and create virtual machine on it.<br/>
+Set the weight of the resource that will prioritize its selection when sorting the nodes according to the free resources.<br/>
+'''''Note:''' The lowest possible weight is 1. You cannot set, e.g. 0.5.''<br/>
+To learn more about nodes and their allowed limits please go back to the [[#Clusters|Clusters]] section of this documentation.<br/>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_30_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In order to use the Load Balancer, you need to enable it in the product's configuration: <br/>
+Define the behavior of the tool:
+*On Upgrade - select the action to perform:
+** None - no action will be triggered
+** Block - the upgrade process will be blocked as there are insufficient resources on the node
+** Migrate - the upgrade process will be performed after the previous migration of the VM to a server with sufficient free space
+*Shutdown VM on Upgrade
+*Stop VM If Shutdown Fails
+*Enable to allow migrating the VM with local disks
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_5.png]]
+|}
+=====Node Prioritization Method=====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 0px 15px;"|Have a look at how the sorting process works, and the rules that it goes by. <br/>
+Let's take exemplary weights for each resource just like the ones presented on the screen above.<br/>
+ VMs Number Weight: 1,5<br/>
+ CPU Weight: 2 <br/>
+ Disk Weight: 4<br/>
+ RAM Weight: 2,5
+"Disk Weight" with the highest weight, which means it has the highest priority, and "VMs Number Weight" as the least crucial factor on a given node.<br/>
+In this case, there are four nodes created, named A, B, C, and D, with current resources as shown below: <br/>
+ Node A (Free Ram: 60%, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 50%, Number of VMs: 5) <br/>
+ Node B (Free Ram: 30%, Free CPU: 70%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Number of VMs: 10) <br/>
+ Node C (Free Ram: 90%, Free CPU: 50%, Free Disk Space: 20%, Number of VMs: 20) <br/>
+ Node D (Free Ram: 80%, Free CPU: 60%, Free Disk Space: 70%, Number of VMs: 15)
+The next step is sorting the nodes according to each resource, it is done by assigning them corresponding priorities from 1 to 4. <br/>The higher the priority, the more free resources available.<br/>
+|}
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 20px; margin-right: auto;"
+! Priority
+! Free Ram
+! Free CPU
+! Free Disk Space
+! Number of VMs
+|-
+| 4
+| Node C
+| Node B
+| Node D
+| Node A
+|-
+| 3
+| Node D
+| Node D
+| Node A
+| Node B
+|-
+| 2
+| Node A
+| Node C
+| Node B
+| Node D
+|-
+| 1
+| Node B
+| Node A
+| Node C
+| Node C
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Now, the final calculation of sorting nodes according to free resources is performed, taking into account the previously defined weights.<br/>
+The process of sorting nodes is based on the following calculation method:<br/>
+ Final Node Priority = (RAM Priority x RAM Weight) + (CPU Priority x CPU Weight) + (Free Disk Priority x Disk Weight) + (No. VMs  Priority x VMs Weight)
+The results for nodes A, B, C and D (with weights and sorting priority) are as follows:
+ Node A: (2 x 2,5) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 3 x 4 ) + ( 4 x 1,5 ) = 25
+ Node B: (1 x 2,5) + ( 4 x 2 ) + ( 2 x 4 ) + ( 3 x 1,5 ) = 23
+ Node C: (4 x 2,5) + ( 2 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 4 ) + ( 1 x 1,5 ) = 19,5
+ Node D: (3 x 2,5) + ( 3 x 2 ) + ( 4 x 4 ) + ( 2 x 1,5 ) = 32,5
+As you can see, Node D has got the highest priority value with the result: 32,5.<br/> It will be selected by Load Balancer to create a new VM on, or to migrate or upgrade an existing VM if its current node does not have sufficient resources.<br/>
+The above described calculations are performed every time, '' 'Create' '' or '' 'Upgrade' '' actions are executed based on the current usage of resources on available nodes.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' In case a given client already has a VM existing on a node, this very node will NOT be taken into account during the prioritization of resources.<br/>
+These security measures are taken to ensure that, in case of node failure, the client will still have access to the other VM server, created on another, properly working node.<br/> At the same time, if this client has VMs on every node already, all of them will be taken into account during the prioritization process again.''<br/>
+If you decide to use the Load Balancer tool, define the resource weights to adjust the prioritization of nodes according to your needs.
+|}
+====Global Limitations====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|
+*'' 'VLANs Limit' '' - enter the maximum number of allowed VLANS per customer
+*'' 'Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node' '' - put a global limit on the number of allowed tasks to create backups per node.<br/> This general limit may be overwritten per single node in the [[#Clusters|cluster settings]] section at: ''Addon → Servers → Server Details → Edit Cluster → Tasks Limit''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_30_5_0.png]]
+|}
+====Task Settings====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|This setting can help you stay informed about failed tasks. When a threshold of task retries is reached a notification email message will be sent out.<br/>
+You can set up a three-tier notification system with separate email contents.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_30_5_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|The default email templates include:
+*Task name
+*Task ID
+*Client ID
+*Service ID
+*Product/Service information
+*Domain
+*Error Message <br/>
+You can pick different email templates from the dropdown fields in the tasks settings or edit the default templates by navigating to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Email Templates'.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_30_5_2.png]]
+|}
+====Admin Area Features====
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The  '' 'Admin Area Features' '' section includes a list of all possible features that can be activated and then available or not for the admin under the product's details.<br/> Below you can find a list of features dedicated to:
+*'''Proxmox VE Cloud VPS'''
+**Virtual Machines
+*'''Proxmox VE VPS'''
+**Start
+**Stop
+**Reboot
+**Shutdown
+**Reinstall
+**Spice Console
+**noVNC console
+**Xterm.js Console
+**Information
+**IP Set
+**Graphs
+*'''Both'''
+**Available Resources
+**IP Addresses
+**Migrate
+**User Details
+**Reconfigure Network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PXC3_30_6.png]]
+|}
+===Scheduled Backups Templates===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In this section, you can create scheduled backup templates, that can be included in your products by default.<br/>
+Preparing a template means there will be no need for the clients to set up their own scheduled backups and their virtual machines will be backed up on a predefined schedule from the get-go.<br/>
+Start by creating and naming a scheduled backups template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Once the template has been created, backup tasks can be included in it.<br/> Click on the '' 'Create Task Template' ''button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Configure the backup schedule as you see fit, you can create as many task templates in the scheduled backups template as you need. <br/>
+*'''Start Time''' - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
+*'''Day of the Week''' -  The days the backups should take place each week.
+*'''Compression type''' - Compression method to be used.
+*'''Backup Mode''' - Decide on the backup mode.
+*'''Send Email Message''' - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
+*'''Recipients''' - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma.<br/>You can include the {clientEmail} variable to include the client's default address in the list or leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.
+Click on '' 'Confirm' ''when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|You can add more task templates if you wish, edit or delete them.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|The scheduled backup template you create can be included as the default backup schedule of your products.<br/>
+The '' 'Scheduled Backup template' '' field can be found in the product's module settings under '' 'Backup'.'' You can also select the '' 'Scheduled Backup Email' '' under '' 'Client Notifications'.''<br/>
+Finally, you may allow your clients to change their scheduled backups by enabling the '' 'Backup Schedule' '' option under '' 'Client Area Features'.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_5.png]]
+|}
+===Firewall Templates===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS allows you to prepare firewall templates for your clients. Those templates can be added to the product's configuration and will be applied in virtual machine creation.<br/>
+Start by clicking on the '' 'Create Template' '' button and naming your new template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_6.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Configure the firewall options according to the needs of your clients. Make sure to click on '' 'Submit' '' to save the changes.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Next, click on the '' 'Add Rule' '' button and add as many firewall rules as you need.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_8.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The last step is to add the firewall template to a product. Navigate to your product's module settings and find the firewall section.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_9.png]]
+|}
+===Operating Systems Groups===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Create Operating Systems Groups in the Proxmox Addon to allow clients to reinstall their virtual machines using the virtual machine templates that you allow. <br/>
+In this section, the process of creating operating systems groups will be showcased.<br/>
+<!--
+For the information regarding the practical use of this feature, see [[#aaa|THIS]] section.<br/>
+-->
+Navigate to '' 'Settings' '' → '' 'Operating Systems Groups' '' and create a new group and name it.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3 30_6_10.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Next we need to add templates that we want to include in this group.<br/>
+Click on the '' 'Add Template' '' button and type in the name of the template that you want to include.<br/> '''It is crucial the name you input in the following window does not contain any typos.'''<br/> If you are not sure how your virtual machine template is named exactly. You can always check the list at a product module settings → Client Area Features → OS Templates.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_11.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Add all the templates you want to include in the group.<br/>
+When finished all that remains is to add the group to the product's configuration.<br/>
+'''''Note:''' Keep in mind that clients will '''not''' be able to transfer from one group to another after the creation of the initial virtual machine, and will only be able to pick templates from the same group when reinstalling.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6_12.png]]
+|}
+===Tasks===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the "Tasks" section, you will find tasks that have already been completed, are still in progress, or are yet to be executed by the cron.<br/> Moreover, by clicking the '' 'Information' '' button, you can display more data on the particular task.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_6.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the information tab, you can see which specific product/service the chosen task was related to. <br/> Moreover, in logs, you can check the API response errors with each timestamp it was returned.<br/>
+'' '''Note:''' The logs will be displayed only in case the errors occur. If the task has finished successfully, there will be nothing to see.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_8.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|If you notice that, for instance, a certain task cannot be completed due to some errors, you can remove it, so the cron no longer attempts to execute it after each iteration. <br/> After you figure out what went wrong, you can try to add it again and check the results.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_30_9.png]]
+|}
+===Widget===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS features a dedicated widget that displays crucial information about the module right in the WHMCS dashboard.<br/>
+The information displayed includes:
+* '''Faulty VM Deployments''' - a list of virtual machines that failed to be created.
+** Related Domain
+** Virtual Machine's ID
+** Related Task
+** Message
+* '''Failed Tasks''' - a list of tasks that failed to complete
+** Job ID
+** Related Customer
+** Related Task
+** Message
+* '''Cluster Remaining Resources''' - a list of resources still available
+** Server Name
+** Remaining Virtual Machine slots
+** Remaining IPv4 Addresses
+** Remaining IPv6 Addresses
+** Remaining IPv6 Subnet
+* '''Node Resources''' - a list of the nodes available
+** Server Name
+** Node
+** Virtual Machine Limit
+Each list can be hidden by disabling it in the addon's general settings.<br/>
+Make sure to enable the widget in the '' 'Show/Hide Widgets' '' menu.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_32_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"| You can change the height of the widget by editing the '' 'widget.tpl' '' file located in '' '/whmcs/modules/widgets/ModulesGardenProxmoxAddon/templates'.''<br/>
+Find this code fragment:
+<code>
+ <style>
+     #MGProxmoxAddonWidget{
+         height: 300px;
+     }
+ </style>
+</code>
+and change it to include <code>max-height: none !important;</code>, like this:
+<code>
+ <style>
+     #MGProxmoxAddonWidget{
+         height: 300px;
+         max-height: none !important;
+     }
+ </style>
+</code>
+Now you will be able to adjust the widget's height by editing the <code>height: value;</code> from the default '' '300px' '' to any value that fits your needs.
+|}
+==Client Area==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The client area interface of Proxmox VPS For WHMCS should look like the one on the screen below.<br />
+As you can see, the control panel contains assorted options that will prove highly useful in VM management.<br />
+The module allows your customers to easily '' 'start', 'reboot', 'stop' '' and '' 'shutdown' '' their servers through pressing specific buttons.<br />
+It is also possible to '' 'reconfigure the network' '' without using the "Change Package" tool to easily update the network interfaces ''(KVM virtualization type only).''<br/>
+Clients can also  access the '' 'noVNC' '', '' 'SPICE' '' and '' 'Xterm.js' '' consoles. Among '' 'Additional Tools' '', you will find options to  '' 'reinstall' '' a server, create a '' 'backup' '' or set up '' 'backup jobs'.''<br />
+Your clients are able to access resource usage '' 'graphs','' view the VM '' 'history','' manage the '' 'network' '' interface device, and set up the '' 'firewall' '' rules. Additionally, clients may take '' 'snapshots' '', and manage '' 'disks'.''<br/>
+On the main product page in the client area, under the '' 'Information' '' headline, your clients can find such details as the current usage of CPU, memory, disk (LXC only) and SWAP (LXC only).<br/>Customers can also view '' 'DNS' '' (LXC only) as well as assigned '' 'IP addresses'. ''
+'' '''Note:''' The bellow example image was taken from the KVM-based VM, but it looks very similar in the case of LXC.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_24_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|By clicking the '' 'Edit' '' button next to the '' 'Information' '' headline, your clients can additionally change the VM hostname and ISO image, choose boot devices, as well as insert their SSH public key.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' If you do not see the Edit icon, it means the option to change hostname has been turned off by the admin.''<br/>
+'''''Note:''' Information elements included in the below table are managed by the admin in the product's configuration section under [[#Client_Area_Features|Client Area Features]].''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_24_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_24_3.png]]
+|}
+==Client Area - VM Management==
+===noVNC Console===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|noVNC console allows your clients to connect to their server in the easiest possible way.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_39_1.png]]
+|}
+===SPICE Console===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|SPICE console enables you to connect to the virtual machine using SPICE.<br />
+'' '''Note:''' Since the 2.7.0 version of the module, your clients '''no longer''' need to [https://www.spice-space.org/download.html download] and install the client side SPICE application in order to connect with a VM. The console will be now opened in the virt-viewer instead.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_40.png]]
+|}
+===Xterm.js Console===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Xterm.js console enables you to connect to the virtual machine using Xterm.js.<br />
+You have to update the scripts on Proxmox v2.6.0. To do so, open the folder: ''UploadOnProxmoxServer/5.2-10'' and upload the content on all your Proxmox servers.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_40_1.png]]
+|}
+==Client Area - Additional Tools==
+===Backups===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''Important!''' Remember that since Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module version '''3.7.0''', a dedicated to backups synchronization cron job must be configured. <br/>
+Make sure you have set up the cron task as described in the addon configuration [[#Configuration_of_Addon|instruction]].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|To create a single backup, press the '' 'Backups' '' button, and click on '' 'Create Backup' '' as shown on the following screen.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_41.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Now, choose the compression type ('' 'None' , 'LZO' '' or '' 'GZIP' '') and the backup mode ('' 'Snapshot' , 'Suspend' '' or '' 'Stop' '') from dropdown menus.<br />Afterward, press '' 'Confirm'. ''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_42.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''''Note:''' Creating a backup is now added to the [[#Tasks|tasks]] list, wait a moment until the task is completed. Once ready, your new backup will appear on the list and will be available for future restoration.'' <br/>
+'''''Note 2:''' You may select the storage for created backups either in the [[#Configuration_of_Product|module settings]] globally, or per node in the [[#Clusters|addon module]] (this setting overwrites the product settings).''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|You may mark backups as protected so they will not be unintentionally deleted.<br/>
+To restore a VM from the backup, press '' 'Restore','' and then click the '' 'Confirm' '' button in a popup window.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_43.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Above the backups list, there is a table with information on '' 'Available Resources'.'' <br /> You will find data on limits put on backups:
+*Backup Size: ''used/allowed''
+*Backup Files: ''used/allowed''
+*Protected Backup Files: ''used/allowed'' <br/>
+Next to the statistics, there is a comfortable and easy-to-read progressive chart to illustrate the usage. If the size is set to '' 'Unlimited','' the chart does not show any progress.<br/>
+Once you have reached the limits, the option to create new backups is blocked.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_43_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|If you would like to restore singular files instead of the whole machine, or simply download them you can do that by clicking on the '' 'Browse Files' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_43_10.png]]
+|}
+===Backup Collection===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Open the collection of all your backups, here you will find the backups created from all your virtual machines.<br/> You may restore this service with any backup of your choice.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_43_2.png]]
+|}
+===Backup Jobs===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''''Important:''' 'Backup Jobs' and 'Backup Schedules' are mutually exclusive and should never be used together.<br/>'Backup Schedules' are meant to replace 'Backup Jobs' as a backup solution that involves much less load on Proxmox VE resources.''<br/><br/>
+By pressing '' 'Backup Jobs' '' in the client area, you will be moved to the backup jobs management page.<br />
+You can easily edit or delete, as well as preview the details of existing backup jobs there.<br />
+To add a new backup job, press '' 'Create Backup Job' '' as shown on the following screen.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_44.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Now, define the backup start time, choose the days when to run it, and select '' 'Compression Type' '' and '' 'Backup Mode' '' from dropdown menus.<br /> Also, select if you want to receive the notification when the backup is ready.<br/>
+Finally, press the '' 'Confirm' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_45.png]]
+|}
+===Backup Schedules===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''''Important:''' 'Backup Jobs' and 'Backup Schedules' are mutually exclusive and should never be used together.<br/>'Backup Schedules' are meant to replace 'Backup Jobs' as a backup solution that involves much less load on Proxmox VE resources.''<br/>
+If you already have '' 'Backup Jobs' '' created and would like to migrate them into Backup Schedules automatically, you should use this cron job task:
+ php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php migrate-backup-jobs-to-schedules --product_id=YOUR_CONFIGURED_PRODUCT_ID
+You will find the cron already personalized for you in the [[#Configuration_of_Addon|General Settings]] tab.<br/>
+Replace '' 'YOUR_CONFIGURED_PRODUCT_ID' '' with the ID of the product you want to perform the migration for.<br/> The ID can be found in the URL link after selecting the product in the Products/Services tab in the admin area. Do not confuse this ID with the ID of clients' products.<br/>Run the task for each of the products you want to perform the migration for.<br/><br/>
+'' 'Backup Schedules' '' can already be created from a template while creating the virtual machine, but can still be freely customized later.<br/> The main difference between scheduled backups and backup jobs is that the scheduled backups are handled entirely by the module instead of the Proxmox server.<br/>
+You can edit or delete existing scheduled backups by using the action buttons.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_45_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|You may also schedule new backups by clicking on the '' 'Create Backup Schedule' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_45_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Configure the backup schedule as you see fit, you can create as many task templates in the scheduled backups template as you need.
+*'''Start Time''' - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
+*'''Day of the Week''' -  The days the backups should take place each week.
+*'''Compression type''' - Compression method to be used.
+*'''Backup Mode''' - Decide on the backup mode.
+*'''Send Email Message''' - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
+*'''Recipients''' - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma. Leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.
+Click on '' 'Confirm' ''when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_45_3.png]]
+|}
+===Disks (KVM only)===
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|View available disks and add new ones.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_6.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Define the additional disk size, choose its bus (the available options may be '' 'IDE', 'SATA', 'VIRTIO' '' or '' 'SCSI' ''), as well as define a disk format - you can choose from '' 'Raw disk image (raw)', 'QEMU image format (qcow2)','' or '' 'VM image format (VMDK)' ''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_8.png]]
+|}
+===Firewall===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Owing to the '' 'Firewall' '' page, your clients can set up firewall rules and enable a security group for their servers from the WHMCS client area.<br />
+As you can see, you can easily modify and remove the previously added rules and security groups.<br />
+To add a new firewall rule press the '' 'Confirm' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|You can add a firewall rule in two ways. Both of them require choosing a direction, action, interface, source, and destination.<br />
+The first way (<span style="color:#FF7F27">orange</span>) is to choose macro from the '' 'Macro' '' dropdown field.<br />
+The second way (<span style="color:#00A2E8">blue</span>) requires you to choose a protocol and fill in both the source and destination ports.<br />
+Additionally, you can enable a rule, and add a comment to it.<br />
+Press '' 'Confirm' '' to create a rule.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Among '' 'Additional Actions' '' you will find three options:
+*'''Add Security group''' - choose a security group and an interface on which the group will be used on.<br />Additionally, you can enable a security group, and add a comment to it. Click '' 'Confirm' '' to use the security group.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|
+*'''Download Rules''' - use this option to simply create a backup, once pressed, a file will be downloaded
+*'''Restore Rules''' - restore any of the previously created backups created. Select one of the previously downloaded files with rules
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_02.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|You may manage the hierarchy of rules on the list. In front of each rule, you can find its '' 'Position' '' marker.<br/> The higher the rule is on the list, the higher priority the rule has assigned. You may change the rule position using the '' 'Move up/down' '' arrows.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_01.png]]
+|}
+===Firewall Options===
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Here you can view the current firewall settings. To decide on its options, press the '' 'Edit' '' button, and adjust them to your needs.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_7_1.png]]
+|}
+===Graphs===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Through pressing the '' 'Graphs' '' button, clients will be moved to the page with the generated graphs showing the CPU and memory usage, network traffic, and disk I/O.<br />
+They can also switch the timeline of graphs by choosing a new one from a dropdown menu indicated on the following screen. Clients can pick between '' 'Hour', 'Day', 'Week', 'Moth' '' and '' 'Year'. ''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_46.png]]
+|}
+===Network===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|Your clients are allowed to add and remove only private network interface devices. Additionally, they may assign other virtual machines to the network, enabling communication between them.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 00px 0px 20px 15px;"|Upon clicking the '' 'Information' '' button, the new popup will open with more network details.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 00px 0px 20px 15px;"|The '' 'Assign Virtual Machine' '' button opens another popup window, where virtual machines to be assigned to the network can be selected and optionally restarted.<br/>A restart is necessary for the changes to be applied if the hotplug functionality is not configured for the virtual machine.<br/> You can find an exemplary scenario illustrating a typical use case of this function in the [[#Connecting_Multiple_VPS_Machines_Into_One_Private_Network|'' 'Use Cases' '' section]] of this wiki.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_1_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 00px 0px 10px 15px;"|Finally, the '' 'Delete' '' button will remove the network. <br/>
+Keep in mind that '' ' Network device' '' options have to be set to '' 'Private'.'' <br/>Also, after the network creation, the button to add another one or delete a newly created private network may not be longer available, depending on your Proxmox configuration.
+|}
+===Reinstallation===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The "Reinstallation" feature can be used to reinstall a new OS on the VM directly by the clients. <br/>
+You can allow your clients to either select a new OS from the provided KVM templates to automatically replace the system, or let them choose the ISO image for manual system installation.
+<br/><br/>
+'' '''Note:''' The ISO images can only be used for the KVM virtualization type, while VM templates can be used either for KVM or LXC.<br/> Additionally, both KVM and LXC users can define the new OS password before a new installation.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_38.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_38_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Remember to grant your clients access to the selected reinstallation types in the  '' 'Client Area Features' '', as well as choose the available '' 'OS Images' '' and '' 'ISO Images' ''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_38_4.png]]
+|}
+===Resource Notifications===
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Within the "Resource Notifications" section, you can configure personalized notifications regarding your machine's utilization.<br/> By creating "Resource Notifications", you enable the system to automatically send email alerts whenever your server exceeds predefined thresholds for network traffic, disk read and write operations, CPU utilization, and memory usage within a specified time frame.<br/> These notifications serve as indicators, ensuring that you stay informed about any significant deviations from normal resource utilization, enabling you to take timely action and maintain optimal performance.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_9.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|To create the first notification rule press the '' 'Create Notification' '' button.<br/> A dedicated form will appear, fill in the described below fields to compose the notification requirements:
+* '''Name''' - enter the rule name
+* '''Status''' - set it to enabled or disabled, can be changed later on
+* '''Notifications Interval''' - define the time interval between notifications in hours. Eg. 8 - notifications will be sent in this frequency
+* '''Data Timeframe''' - specify the time duration to extract and verify data usage (in minutes, eg. 30)
+* '''Exceed All''' - if enabled, all the below setup conditions will have to be met to send the notification
+* '''Email Address''' - if you want to send the notification to other addresses than the main customer's address, enter them here separated by a comma
+* Conditions for:
+** '''Network Traffic [%]''' - sum of Net In and Net Out expressed in percentage value towards Rate Limit Network
+** '''CPU Usage [%]''' - a percentage that represents the overall utilization of CPU. It indicates how much of the CPU's processing capability is being utilized.
+** '''Memory Usage [%]''' - percentage of memory usage towards the VM RAM
+** '''Disk Read [%]''' and '''Disk Write [%]''' - disk usage percentage is calculated based on the Hard Disk Speed limits (respectively: Read Limit and Write Limit).<br/> If there are no limits set for Hard Disk Speed, the dedicated fields in the client area ''('Disk Read [%]' and 'Disk Write [%]')'' will not be displayed
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_10.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|A ready notification rule appears on the list, here you may quickly turn it on/off ''(1)'' depending on your current needs, change ''(2)'' the rules or delete ''(3)'' the notification.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_11.png]]
+|}
+<!--
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|This is how an exemplary email notification delivered to the target mailbox might look like.<br/> On the screen below an inbuilt module email template named "Resource Notification" has been used without any customizations:
+|}
+-->
+===Snapshots===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|Use a snapshot to remember the current contents of the virtual machine memory. You may use them later to restore the VM's settings. <br/> Please remember that it is necessary to run the following cron command for snapshot jobs. <br/> You may set the cron command once a day or every hour. Do not forget to replace 'your_whmcs' with your WHMCS root location.
+<pre> php -q /your_whmcs/modules/addons/proxmoxAddon/cron/cron.php snapshots </pre>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Press the '' 'Take Snapshot' '' button and fill out the form to take a snapshot.<br/> Name it (use the alphabetical characters and no spaces), choose whether to include RAM, and add a description.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|It is also possible to set up '' 'Snapshot Jobs' '' where snapshots can be created according to your preferences (daily or hourly). Click on '' 'New Job' '' in order to add a new snapshot job.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_5_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|As you complete the form, remember to fill in the '' 'Name' '' field without spaces or special characters- ''only capital letters and numbers are allowed here.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_5_2.png]]
+|}
+===Task History===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|To access the history of a machine, simply press the '' 'Task History' '' button. Afterward, the customer can see all the actions performed on the VM, as well as their status.<br/>
+If an error has occurred during the execution of a task, the client can view the API response error by clicking on the '' 'Information' '' icon.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_47.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_47_1.png]]
+|}
+===VM Power Tasks===
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|The "VM Power Tasks" section empowers you to effortlessly create and manage automated power tasks for your virtual machine, all in one convenient location.<br/> With the ability to define task rules, you can automate multiple actions and minimize your manual intervention in VM operations.<br/>
+To begin configuring your first rule, simply click on "Add Task".
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_12.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|A new form will appear with the following options to provide:
+* Description - task description or short name
+* Action - select the action the task is to execute:
+** Start the machine
+** Stop the machine
+** Reboot the machine
+* Specify the exact time to keep the task active:
+** Start Date ''(use the calendar to specify the task beginning date)''
+** Start Time - provide the exact hour to activate the task
+** End Date ''(use the calendar to specify the task ending date)''
+** End Time - provide the exact hour to deactivate the task
+* Job Type - choose the task type and define its execution frequency
+** One Time - the job will be executed only once, specify the time to start the task:
+*** Job Hour
+*** Job Minutes ''(rounded to 5 minutes)''
+** Daily - the job will be executed every day of the week, specify the time to start the task:
+*** Job Hour
+*** Job Minutes ''(rounded to 5 minutes)''
+** Weekday - the job will be executed on selected days, specify the time to start the task:
+*** Job Hour
+*** Job Minutes ''(rounded to 5 minutes)''
+*** Day of Week - select days when the task will be executed
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_13.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|The power tasks list provides a comprehensive overview of all the tasks associated with power management on your virtual machine.<br/> You can easily identify active actions tasks, ensuring that your virtual machine operates according to your desired configurations.<br/> Additionally, the flexibility to modify existing rules ''(1)'' allows you to adjust the tasks' parameters to align with your needs. If necessary, you can also remove unwanted tasks from the list ''(2)''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_48_14.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''''Important:''' "VM Powre Tasks" require a dedicated cron job to be set up by the administrator.''
+|}
+==Configurable Options==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|When you successfully set up a product, your client can order it by choosing from the default configurable options.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' Storage Disc Space configurable option, when used by the client, overwrites the product configuration '' 'Disk Space'' ' option.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_53.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In case those options do not suit your needs, you can edit them.<br />
+Go to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Products/Services' '' → '' 'Configurable Option' '' and press the edit button next to the configurable option used by your product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_54.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Here you can view all the products this configurable option group is assigned to.<br />
+Now, we will show you how to edit options. Let's say you want to add an option to order a VPS with 4 cores per socket.<br />
+To do so, edit '' 'The number of cores per socket' '' by pressing the edit button as shown on the screen below.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_55.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|You will see a popup window, so make sure your browser does not block it.<br />
+To add a new option, enter it in the textbox located below all other options. If you want to replace the option you currently have, simply edit the textbox.<br />
+Finish by pressing '' 'Save Changes'. ''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_56.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|More information about WHMCS configurable options and their editing can be found [https://docs.whmcs.com/Addons_and_Configurable_Options here].
+|}
+===List of Configurable Options===
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|
+The table below lists all configurable options used by the module for the chosen virtualization type.<br/>
+Note that the name on the left is a variable (which you <u>should not edit</u>), separated by the | from the editable custom name.
+|}
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 25px; margin-bottom: 20px"
+! style="width:400px; text-align:center;" | KVM<br />
+! style="width:400px; text-align:center;" | LXC<br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>The number of CPU sockets|CPU Sockets</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>cores|CPU Cores</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>The number of cores per socket|CPU Cores</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>cpulimit|Limit Of CPU</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>cpulimit|Limit Of CPU</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>CPU units for a VM|CPU Units For The VM</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>CPU weight for a VM|CPU Units For The VM</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Amount of RAM|Amount Of RAM</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Amount of RAM|Amount Of RAM</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Amount of SWAP|Amount Of SWAP</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Disk Space|Disk Space</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Disk Space|Disk Space</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disks Space</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disks Space</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>additionalDisksSpace_[Storage_name]|Additional Disk Space [Storage_name]</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>IP Addresses|IPv4 Addresses</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>IP Addresses|IPv4 Addresses</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>IPv6 Addresses|IPv6 Addresses</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>IPv6 Addresses|IPv6 Addresses</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>IPv6 Addresses|IPv6 Subnets</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>IPv6 Addresses|IPv6 Subnets</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>privateNetwork|Private Network</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>privateNetwork|Private Network</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Backups Limit|Backups Size</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Backups Limit|Backups Size</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Backups Files Limit|Backup Files</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Backups Files Limit|Backup Files</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>backupProtectedFiles|Protected Backup Files</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>backupProtectedFiles|Protected Backup Files</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>snapshots|Snapshots</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>snapshots|Snapshots</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>snapshotJobs|Snapshot Jobs</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>snapshotJobs|Snapshot Jobs</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Bandwidth|Bandwidth</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Bandwidth|Bandwidth</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>VM Template|VM Template</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>VM Template|VM Template</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>archive|Archive</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>archive|Archive</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>Network Rate|Network Rate</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>Network Rate|Network Rate</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>vcpus|VCPUs</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>tag|Tag</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>ISO Image|ISO Image</nowiki><br />
+| <nowiki>storage|Storage Disk Space</nowiki><br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>osType|OS Type</nowiki><br />
+| <br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>cicustom|Custom Cloud-Init Configuration</nowiki><br />
+| <br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>ciscript|Cloud-Init Script</nowiki><br />
+| <br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>tag|Tag</nowiki><br />
+| <br />
+|-<br />
+| <nowiki>storage|Storage Disk Space</nowiki><br />
+|
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|Differences between the '''cicustom''' and the '''ciscript''' configurable options:<br/>
+'''cicustom''' - it is a more advanced alternative to the "ciscript" configurable option. Using the "cicustom" option results in sending the configuration specified by the administrator.<br/>
+'''ciscript''' - using the "ciscript" option results in passing the script ID available in Proxmox Addon, which will be uploaded to the snippet storage and passed to the Proxmox VE server during the virtual machine creation.
+|}
+<!--
+==Bridges Configuration==
+Nic z tego nie rozumiem :/
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 15px;"|Select multiple private bridges for private network configuration to assign those IP addresses upon VM creation
+with the appropriate bridge setting selected in module's IP management
+*http://git.mglocal/whmcs-products/Proxmox/-/issues/1388
+*http://git.mglocal/whmcs-products/Proxmox/-/issues/1522
+*http://git.mglocal/whmcs-products/Proxmox/-/issues/1508#note_320966
+*http://git.mglocal/whmcs-products/Proxmox/-/issues/1340
+W zależności od wybranego produktu admin chce aby używało to innego bridge-a
+'''Private Network section:'''
+*'''Legacy Private Bridge''' ''(before 3.7.0: Private Bridge option)'' - use this option to select a default private bridge if you have not selected multiple bridges in the "Private Brdiges" setting.
+*'''Private Bridges''' - select private bridges from all available bridges
+When fetching IP addresses in NetworkService, only those IPs that match the selected Private Bridges will be retrieved. If it turns out that no Private Bridges are chosen, the ''Legacy Private Bridge'' will be used.
+* DHCP - Enable DHCP to assign network configuration details from a DHCP server automatically. This option makes the module use DHCP instead of reserving an IP address.
+'''Virtual Machine Configuration''':
+* '''Private Network Rate Limit''' - set the limits for the network rate, separate setting of the network rate limit for the private bridge independent from the public network
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2xxx.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|
+Należy dodać opcje w konfiguracja produktu (checkboxy dwa), która jeżeli jest zaznaczona spowoduje usunięcie aktualnych adresów IP o pobranie nowych ale już z nowym bridgem:
+Reassign Private IP Addresses After Upgrade/ Reassign Public IP Addresses After Upgrade - If enabled, upon the product upgrade/downgrade, currently assigned IP addresses will be removed and replaced with equivalents on the new bridge. If there are no corresponding free IP addresses in the new bridge, any free IP addresses will be assigned in their place.
+Virtual Machine upgrades - when upgrading a VM remember to avoid mixing bridges in product settings.<br/>
+When upgrading a product, the single bridge corresponding to a private IP address must be related to a private address in the target product as well.<br/>
+In case you use different bridges, private addresses are treated as public and the other way around.<br/>
+Take a look to see an exemplary situation of correctly assigned bridges:
+* '''Product 1''' (about to be upgraded):
+** Private: '''vmbr1'''
+** Public: '''vmbr0'''
+* '''Product 2''' (target product):
+** Private: '''any bridge except vmbr0'''
+** Public: '''any bridge except vmbr1'''
+|}
+-->
+==Integration with Products Reseller For WHMCS==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"| The close integration of [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/products-reseller Products Reseller For WHMCS] with [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS] will certainly bring advantages to your business. <br/> You will be able to resell your Proxmox VE VPS servers using WHMCS or any other platform. <br/> Thanks to extra settings available only for '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' products, your resellers are granted the possibility to customize offered services to meet clients’ needs.<br/> Moreover, you can easily monitor the income and manage your reseller groups.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|In the '' 'Products Reseller For WHMCS' '' module, you can handily create your own integrations as well as assign as many various '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' products as you wish.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|In addition, the extra setting options that are available only for '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' products will definitely make your offer more competitive.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Once an order is placed, the enabled setting options will appear in the side menu along with additional information about the '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' product at the bottom of the page. <br/>Now, the '' 'Proxmox VE VPS' '' product can be simply administered straight from the client area.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|What is also important is that you can keep under control all key details such as orders, income, and groups of resellers straight from the  '' 'Products Reseller' '' panel. <br/> If you want to find out more about the '''Products Reseller For WHMCS''' module, please proceed [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Products_Reseller_For_WHMCS here]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_3.png]]
+|}
 ==Management of Billing==
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 25px;"|When you combine Proxmox VPS For WHMCS With Advanced Billing For WHMCS, you will be able to set up additional billing options.<br />
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|When you combine Proxmox VPS For WHMCS with [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Advanced_Billing_For_WHMCS Advanced Billing For WHMCS], you will be able to set up additional billing options.<br />
-Module allows you to charge your customers based on the server resources used by them.
+The module allows you to charge your customers based on the server resources they have used.<br/>
+'' Note: Advanced Billing supports '''OpenVZ''' (prior to Proxmox v2.3.0), '''KVM''' and the '''LXC''' virtualization type.
 |}
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX32.png]]
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|With Advanced Billing For WHMCS module, you can also display the current resource usage of your customer's server, as well as its total cost.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58.png]]
+|}
+==Management of Existing Accounts==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|
+'''You can easily use Proxmox VE VPS module with your existing Proxmox accounts. To do so, follow the instructions below:'''<br />
+. Create and configure a Proxmox VE VPS server, and a server group.<br />
+. Create and configure a Proxmox VE VPS product.<br />
+. Place a new order with the previously created product for your customer. '''Do not activate the product yet.'''<br />
+. Access the just created product from the admin area via the Client Profile → '' 'Products/Services' '' section and fill out 2 custom fields.<br />
+They are '' 'VMID' '' and '' 'Node' ''. ''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXIm_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|
+. If possible, enter IP addresses into fields '' 'Dedicated IP' '' and '' 'Assigned IPs' ''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXIm_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|
+. Set the product status to '' 'Active' ''.<br />
+'''Remember not to click the '' 'Create' '' button during the entire process. That would unnecessarily create a new virtual machine.'''
+|}
+==Servers Location Management==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|''Important: [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/Server_Allocator_For_WHMCS '''Server Allocator For WHMCS'''] is required to allow location management.''<br/><br/>
+'''In order to allow defining locations for Proxmox VPS, follow the below steps:'''<br/>
+. In your product's '' 'Module Settings' '', set up '' 'Default Node' '' to '' 'Server-Node'. ''<br/>
+. Create a WHMCS server for each Proxmox node.<br/>
+. Manually create a configurable option, name it e.g.: '' 'Location'. '' Add options for each server within that configurable option.<br/>
+. Install our Server Allocator For WHMCS module and configure it properly.
+: It must assign a server to a product depending on the selected option in '' 'Location' '' configurable option.<br/>
+'''Keep in mind that all locations need to have exactly the same configuration.'''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|Now, a client may order a VPS, and select '' 'Location'.'' Server Allocator For WHMCS will change the server assigned to the product. <br/>
+The "Create" action is triggered on the assigned server due to the '' 'Server-Node' '' option enabled.
+|}
+=Use Cases=
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''In this section, you will find exemplary scenarios illustrating typical use cases, along with specifics on how the module's functionalities can be applied in practice.'''<br/>
+Review the following scenarios for practical examples of the module usage.
+|}
+==Selling Predefined Windows Virtual Machines==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|
+'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' can be used to sell predefined Windows-based virtual machines. Follow the instructions below, to prepare the template for Windows Virtual Machines and configure the module. <br/>
+Keep in mind that the instructions are for Kernel-based Virtual Machines (KVM) only.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"| '''First, a template virtual machine needs to be prepared in Proxmox:''' <br/>
+. Start a new virtual machine with a Windows Installer ISO file mounted. <br/>
+. Make sure the '' 'OS Type' '' in the virtual machine's options includes '' 'Windows.' '' <br/>
+. Install '' 'Windows Operating System' '' on the virtual machine. <br/>
+. Install '' 'Qemu Guest Agent.' '' The module will detect and run it if the OS Type is set to Windows. <br/>
+. Stop the virtual machine. You can delete the CD Drive (it will not be needed anymore). <br/>
+. Convert the virtual machine to a template. <br/>
+. If you are using '' 'Shared Storage,' '' upload the template to it. If you do not use '' 'Shared Storage,' '' make sure to upload the template to every node.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Next, the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module settings need to be correctly configured:''' <br/>
+. Enable the '' 'Guest Agent' '' in the product's [[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|module settings]].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_1.png]]
+|}
+<!--
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|2. Define which '' 'OS Templates' '' will be available in the Reinstall section in the client area.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_2.png]]
+|}
+-->
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|2. Generate [[#Finalizing_The_Configuration|'' 'Configurable Options' '']] responsible for the virtual machine templates. Including only Windows templates in the [[#Configurable_Options|Configurable Options]] is recommended.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_5.png]]
+|}
+==Selling Predefined Linux Virtual Machines==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|
+'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' can be used to sell predefined Linux-based virtual machines. Follow the instructions below, to prepare the template for Linux Virtual Machines and configure the module. <br/>
+Keep in mind that the instructions are for Kernel-based Virtual Machines (KVM) only.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''First, a template virtual machine needs to be prepared in Proxmox:''' <br/>
+. Create a template Cloud-Init virtual machine based on this [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Cloud-Init_Support documentation]. <br/>
+. If you would like to make additional changes in the template (e.g. login with a password, root access via SSH) then: <br/>
+# Create a new virtual machine with the template from step 1. <br/>
+# Log in to the virtual machine. <br/>
+# Introduce any changes you want the new template to have. <br/>
+# Convert the virtual machine to a new template. <br/>
+. If you are using '' 'Shared Storage,' '' upload the template to it. If you are not using '' 'Shared Storage', '' you will need to upload the template to every node.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Next, the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module settings need to be correctly configured:''' <br/>
+. Make sure '' 'Cloud-Init' '' is enabled in the product's [[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|module settings]].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|2. Define which '' 'OS Templates' '' will be available in the Reinstall section in the client area.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|3. Generate [[#Finalizing_The_Configuration|'' 'Configurable Options' '']] responsible for the virtual machine templates.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_58_1_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|Optionally, set prices for '' 'VM Template [[#Configurable_Options|Configurable Options]].' '' Navigate to '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Products/Services' '' → '' 'Configurable Options.' '' in order to do so.
+|}
+==Connecting Multiple VPS Machines Into One Private Network==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS allows connecting multiple VPS machines into one private network.<br/> To do so, you will need at least 2 virtual machines. In our case, the hostname of the first virtual machine is: '' 'virtualmachine1.com' '' and the hostname of the second one is: '' 'virtualmachine2.com.' '' <br/>
+First, pick one of the machines and navigate to '' 'Additional Tools' '' → '' 'Network' '' in your client area.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Once there, assign a new private network to the virtual machine you have selected by clicking on the '' 'Create Private Network' '' button. <br/> If there are any private IP addresses available, a new network will be created and this virtual machine will be assigned to it.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Now, you can assign other virtual machines you own to this very network. Click on the '' 'Assign Virtual Machine' '' button.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Select the virtual machine that you want to add to the network. You can identify it by its hostname. In our case, we want to add '' 'virtualmachine2.com.' ''<br/> Restarting the virtual machine is optional, but recommended, as it will allow it to connect to the network as soon as possible.<br/>'''''Note:''' The reason for this is that if the virtual machine does not have the hotplug functionality configured, it has to be restarted for the change to be implemented.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"| After clicking on '' 'Confirm' '' button, you should receive information stating that the virtual machine has been successfully assigned to the private network.
+|}
+==Selling Virtual Machine Upgrades==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS integrates WHMCS '' 'Upgrades' '' and '' 'Configurable Options' '' to enable clients to change their virtual machine's specification.
+See the instructions below on how those functions work with the module. <br/> Please note that:
+*When an upgrade is performed and the template of the virtual machine changes, the machine will always be reinstalled.
+*Upgrades can only be performed within the same type of products, i.e. KVM to KVM; LXC to LXC.
+*Disk size '''downgrading''' is not supported.
+*For more information regarding the WHMCS product upgrade function, visit this [https://docs.whmcs.com/Automated_Upgrades_and_Downgrades guide].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Upgrading from one product to another.''' <br/>
+. Configure the first product as you normally would. For the sake of an example, in the product's [[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|module settings]], we will set the limits to 4GiB of disk space, and 512MiB of RAM.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|2. Create another product in the same way, but this time with higher limits. For the second product, we will set the limits to 6GiB of disk space, and 1024MiB of RAM.<br/> Of course, you can change any properties of the products as you see fit.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|3. Open the '' 'Upgrades' '' section of the first product and select the products you would like to allow the clients to upgrade it to.<br/> In our case, we will choose the newly created 6GB product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|4. In the client area, a new option will be visible, and the client will be able to place an order to upgrade their product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|5. Once the order is accepted, the virtual machine has to be rebooted for the upgrade to take place.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The changes will immediately be visible in the client area and the admin area.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_6.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Another way for the client to upgrade their virtual machines is to utilize the [[#Configurable_Options|'' 'Configurable Options' '']] function instead. In this way, all the changes in the specification will take place within the same product.''' <br/>
+. For the products that have the '' 'Configurable Options' '' assigned, you can use those as an upgrade option. Tick the '' 'Configurable Options' '' checkbox in the '' 'Upgrades' '' section.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|2. In the client area, a new option to upgrade the configurable options will be displayed.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_8.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|3. Clients will be able to pick their configuration again, all within the possible range that you have defined in configurable options. <br/> If you prepare configurable options for, say, the number of snapshots, the client will be able to pay for an increased limit of snapshots.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_9.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|4. After the order is accepted, the configuration will update once the virtual machine is rebooted.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_10.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The changes will immediately be visible in the client admin areas.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_57_11.png]]
+|}
+==Selling Additional Storage==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 5px 15px;"|'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' can take advantage of the '' 'Configurable Options' '' function to allow admins to sell additional storage space to their clients.<br/> Follow the instructions below, to see how to set up additional storage space options for your clients.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|In the product's [[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|module settings]], at the very bottom, you can find a list of available configurable options. The ones that we are interested in right now are:
+ additionalDisksSpace|Additional Disks Space
+and
+ additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]|Additional Disk Space (STORAGE_NAME)
+The difference between them is that '' 'additionalDisksSpace' '' can include any combination of any storage detected on your server, but only one option can be selected. <br/>
+In the case of '' 'additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]' '' only the chosen storage will be included in the options.<br/> Still, you can set multiple configurable options of this type, allowing the client to freely choose how much of which storage they would like to buy.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Click on '' 'Create Configurable Options' '' and select relevant options to generate a template that you can edit under '' 'System Settings' '' → '' 'Products/Services' '' → '' 'Configurable Options.' ''<br/>
+'''''Note:''' You can also create them manually if you prefer.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Here is an example '' 'additionalDisksSpace' '' configurable option:'''
+*'''Option name''' - you can change the display name after the '|' symbol.
+*'''Options''' - the possible options the client will be able to choose from, the left side has to be specifically '' '[storage_name]:[size];[another_storage_name]:[size]' '' while the right side is what the client will see.<br/>Storage can be combined into one option if you put a semicolon between each storage name. An option to not buy any additional storage is represented with '' '-1.' ''
+*'''Pricing''' - set an individual price for every option.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"| The option to buy additional storage space will now be displayed in the client area while ordering a new product, or [[#Virtual_Machine_Upgrade|upgrading]] configurable options.<br/>
+While using the '' 'additionalDisksSpac' '' configurable option, only strict storage configurations defined by the administrator are available.<br/>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_6.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|
+'''The '' 'additionalDisksSpace_[STORAGE_NAME]' '' configurable option can be used to achieve a different effect.'''<br/>
+Set up multiple configurable options like on the screen below.<br/>
+*'''Option name''' - this time the left side defines the storage type for all options.
+*'''Options''' - the left side only includes the number of gigabytes.
+*'''Pricing''' - make sure to set a price for each option.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Once configurable options for every storage are created, the clients will be able to freely choose their own combinations.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_8.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|After the order for additional storage is accepted, the user may create additional disks as they see fit, within the limits specified when placing the order and the product's module settings.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_9.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Here is an explanation of each field:
+*'''Size''' - the size of the new disk. Limited by the purchased additional storage, limits are unique to each storage type.
+*'''Storage Type''' - similarly limited by the purchased additional storage.<br/> '' '''Note:''' While there is an option to pick a default storage type in the product's module settings, the clients will still need to buy the storage space to create an additional disk on it.''
+*'''Bus''' - the type of interface the disk uses, the options can be specified in the product's module settings, under '' 'Additional Disks' '' → '' 'Additional Disk Type' ''.
+*'''Format''' - the format the disk will use, the options can be specified in the product's module settings, under '' 'Additional Disks' '' → '' 'Additional Disk Format' ''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_10.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|If you would like to change how the storage types are displayed to the client, you can do so. <br/>
+. Find and edit the english.php file located in ''modules/servers/ProxmoxVPS/langs/english.php''. <br/>
+. Find the line responsible for the display name of your additional storage, it should look like this:
+ $_LANG['storage']['local-lvm'] = 'Local-lvm';
+. The text after the '=' is the display name and can be edited.<br/>
+. The string in the second bracket is the storage type. You can add more lines in the same manner, for each of your storage type configurable options, like so:
+ $_LANG['storage']['local-ssd'] = 'SSD Storage';
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_12.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|The virtual machine has to be rebooted before the new disks are enabled and usable.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_59_11.png]]
+|}
+==Scheduling Backups==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' can be used to plan and handle scheduled backups. This feature in conjunction with limiting backup tasks per node can substantially offload your Proxmox platform.<br/>
+To start scheduling backups navigate to '' 'Additional Tools' '' → '' 'Backup Schedules' '' and click on '' 'Create Backup Schedule'.''<br/>
+Alternatively, you can prepare [[#Including_Predefined_Backup_Schedules|templates]] to automate this process.<br/>
+'''''Note:''' Make sure that backup schedules are enabled in the product's module settings under '[[#KVM_Virtualization_Type|Client Area Features]]'.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_60_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"| A configuration window for the first schedule will open. Set up as many schedules as you need.
+*'''Start Time''' - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
+*'''Day of the Week''' -  The days the backups should occur each week.
+*'''Compression type''' - Compression method to be used.
+*'''Backup Mode''' - Decide on the backup mode.
+*'''Send Email Message''' - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
+*'''Recipients''' - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma. Leave the field empty to only send the notification to the default address.
+Click on '' 'Confirm' ''when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_60_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 25px;"|Now that the backups are scheduled, they will be mostly handled by the module, but you can further reduce the stress put on your Proxmox platform by limiting backup-related tasks per node.<br/>
+Open the Proxmox Addon in your admin area and navigate to '' 'General Settings' ''. Find the '' 'Default Limit of Backup Tasks Per Node' '' and reduce the number, decreasing the load on your Proxmox platform.<br/>
+Remember to save changes each time you change the limit.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_60_3.png]]
+|}
+==Including Predefined Backup Schedules==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|You can include scheduled backup templates with '''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' products. This negates the need to set up backup schedules for each client.<br/>A template only has to be prepared once and will be included with every product you choose. <br/>
+To set up a template, open the Proxmox Addon and navigate to '' 'Settings' '' → '' 'Scheduled Backups Templates', '' click on '' 'Create Scheduled Backups Template' '' and name the template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_61_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Next, click on '' 'Create Task Template' '' and define the following details. You can create multiple task templates.
+*'''Start Time''' - The time when the task for a backup will be issued. Make sure the time you input meets the format: 24-hour time notation with the zeroes included. For example, 07:05, 20:30
+*'''Day of the Week''' -  The days the backups should occur each week.
+*'''Compression type''' - Compression method to be used.
+*'''Backup Mode''' - Decide on the backup mode.
+*'''Send Email Message''' - Decide if an email notification about the backup should be sent always, never, or only on failure.
+*'''Recipients''' - include the email addresses you would like the notification to be sent to. Separate each address with a comma.<br/>You can include the {clientEmail} variable to include the client's default address in the list or leave the field empty to only send the notification to that default address.
+Click on '' 'Confirm' ''when ready.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_61_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Once the template is created, it can be included in the product's module settings.<br/> Each time a new virtual machine is created using this configuration, the scheduled backups will be set up according to the template. <br/> Remember to save changes each time you change module settings.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_61_3.png]]
+|}
+==Including Predefined Firewall Settings==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|You can include firewall templates with '''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' products, which eliminates the need to set up firewall settings for each individual client.<br/> A template only needs to be prepared once and will be included with every product.<br/>
+To set up a template, open the Proxmox Addon, navigate to '' 'Settings' '' → '' 'Firewall Templates','' click on '' 'Create Template','' and name the template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_62_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Configure the template's firewall settings as needed for the specific product and click on '' 'Submit'.'' You can also add firewall rules to the template, proceed to '' 'Add Rule'.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_62_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|Prepare as many rules as you need for the given template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_62_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Once a template is created all that remains is to include it in a product's module settings. Remember to save changes.<br/>
+Every virtual machine created with the firewall template included in the configuration will have its firewall preset, eliminating the need to manually configure the firewall for each machine.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_62_4.png]]
+|}
+==Incorporating Operating Systems Groups==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|In '''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' you may categorize your operating system templates into groups. <br/> When a virtual machine is created for the first time using a specific template, future reinstallations are limited to templates included in the same groups.<br/>
+To create operating systems groups open the Proxmox Addon and navigate to '' 'Settings' '' → '' 'Operating Systems Group'.''<br/>Click on '' 'Create Operating Systems Group' '' and name your group.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Click on '' 'Add Template' '' and type in the exact name of the operating system template.<br/> If you need a reminder, you can see the list of your operating system templates in, for example, the module settings → '' 'Virtual Machine Configuration' '' → '' 'OS Template'.''<br/>
+Add all the templates that you want to include in the group.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_2.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Repeat the process for different operating systems groups.<br/>
+In this example, we will create a group for free Linux systems and another one for Windows.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|After the groups are created, open a product's module settings and find '' 'OS Groups' '' under '' 'Client Area Features'.''<br/> Pick the groups you would like to include from the list.<br/>
+Keep in mind that if the template used by the virtual machine is featured in more than one group, clients will be able to reinstall their virtual machines using '''any''' template included across all of the mentioned groups,<br/>as long as those groups are included in the product's module settings.<br/>
+'''''Note:''' Once a product is categorized into a group, the 'OS Templates' field will not be taken into account while displaying available templates.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Once the client's virtual machine is created, the '' 'Reinstall' '' function will be limited by the operating systems groups. <br/>
+In this example, the client chooses '' 'Ubuntu' '' in the order form, so after machine creation, he can only reinstall within the '' 'Linux systems' '' group.<br/>
+If the client chooses '' 'Windows 11','' he will be locked to the '' 'Windows systems' '' group.<br/>
+If we included Ubuntu in the '' 'Windows systems' '' group, the client would be able to reinstall to every system included within those two groups.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_5.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|With the current configuration, this client can only reinstall to Windows (and change his operating systems group) by upgrading his product.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_7.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|Admins can check and manually change the base template, and by extension, the operating systems group.<br/>
+The information is recorded in the '' 'Base Template' '' custom field.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_63_6.png]]
+|}
+==Using Load Balancer==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|'''Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS''' includes a load balancer feature that can help you make sure your server resources are used efficiently. Some of the possible setups include:
+*Setting up an equal number of virtual machines on each node.
+*Migrating virtual machines on upgrade when a node runs out of free space.
+*And much more.<br/>
+The general information can be found in the [[#Load_Balancer|dedicated section]] of the wiki. Here are two practical examples of the load balancer working in practical scenarios.
+<br/><br/>
+'''Example 1''' <br/>
+If we have two uneven nodes, for example, one with 64 CPU (A) and another with only 32 CPU (B), we can use the load balancer to make sure the smaller one doesn't reach its full load too fast.<br/>
+Imagine you didn't set up the load balancer to favor the CPU, and the nodes were assigned an equal number of virtual machines. The load could look somewhat like this:
+ Node A (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 80%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Free RAM: 60%)<br/>
+ Node B (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 40%, Free RAM: 60%)
+If the creation of new virtual machines continues, node B will run out of free CPU soon.<br/>
+If we set up the load balancer in this way:<br/>
+ VMs Number Weight: 1<br/>
+ CPU Weight: 10 <br/>
+ Disk Weight: 2<br/>
+ RAM Weight: 3
+This is how the calculation will go:
+ Node A: (1 x 1) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 3 ) = 26
+ Node B: (1 x 1) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 2 ) + ( 1 x 3 ) = 16
+Node A gets the higher number, so virtual machines will be created on node A until the free CPU resource priority changes in favor of node B.<br/>
+In this way, node B will no longer run out of free CPU any faster than node A.<br/>
+'''''Note:''' You can of course use different weights, the important part is that you put emphasis on the CPU Weight, and make it significantly bigger than the rest.''<br/><br/>
+'''Example 2'''<br/>
+Here is another example. Let's say we have 2 nodes with the same specification, but we allow our customers to personalize their virtual machines with bigger disk space, RAM, etc.<br/>
+If we only use the number of virtual machines in the calculation, the free resources on the nodes will be uneven:
+ Node A (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 20%, Free Disk Space: 50%, Free RAM: 60%)<br/>
+ Node B (Number of VMs: 10, Free CPU: 50%, Free Disk Space: 12%, Free RAM: 40%)
+But if we set up the load balancer to not favor the number of virtual machines, but the resources equality:
+ VMs Number Weight: 1<br/>
+ CPU Weight: 10 <br/>
+ Disk Weight: 10<br/>
+ RAM Weight: 10
+The calculation will look like this:
+ Node A: (1 x 1) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 2 x 10 ) = 51
+ Node B: (1 x 1) + ( 2 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 10 ) + ( 1 x 10 ) = 41
+The virtual machines will be placed on node A, as long as it has more free resources, the number of virtual machines hardly matters anymore.<br/>
+Node B will be used again when it has more free resources than node A.
+|}
+==Changing Bandwidth Usage Reset Date==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|By default the bandwidth usage in Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS resets each month, on the day of the product registration.<br/>
+If the product was first registered 21st of March, the bandwidth will reset on the 21st of each month.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_64.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|There is however, an option to have the bandwidth usage reset on the first day of the month. This can be beneficial for easier billing, easier usage tracking, and reduced confusion in general.<br/> It might also be a good idea if you want all of your customers to have their bandwidth usage reset on the exact same day.<br/>
+To make this change, navigate to the product's module settings and the '' 'General' '' section, where you will find the '' 'Reset Usage First Day of Month' '' switch.<br/>
+Turning the switch on will change the reset day.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_65.png]]
+|}
+==Providing rDNS Management for Proxmox VE VPS==
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|With '''DNS Manager For WHMCS''', you can offer clients the ability to manage rDNS records for IP addresses allocated to their ordered servers.<br/>
+Learn more about this feature and how it integrates with Proxmox VE VPS in a  [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/DNS_Manager_For_WHMCS#Delivering_DNS_Zone_Management_With_rDNS_For_Ordered_Servers dedicated section] of DNS Manager For WHMCS documentation page.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_66.png]]
 |}
 =Tips=
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 0px;"|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 15px 15px;"|1. Operations performed on the virtual servers are not executed immediately. Give your Proxmox Virtual Environment some time to process the request and execute the operation.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|2. Multiple '''physical Proxmox servers''' can be joined into one cluster.<br />
+When they are joined into one '''cluster''', you can access all of them by connecting to just one.<br />
+*'''Auto-node''' - creates a new VM on the server (node) with the most free resources, so the administrator cannot control it<br />
+*'''Server-node''' - creates a VM on the server (node) whose IP address or node host (e.g. node1.yourproxmox.com) was provided during the WHMCS's server configuration,<br />allowing the administrator to control the node choice
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|3. If you set the product type to '' 'Hosting Account' '' when adding a new product, you will not need to fill out nameservers as they will be automatically set up.<br/> But if you still want to use the '' 'Server/VPS' '' product type, [https://requests.whmcs.com/topic/ability-to-remove-the-nameserver-options-on-order-page this article] might help you in learning how to remove nameservers from your order template.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|4. OS Templates are not automatically downloaded while configuring a product.<br/> For each virtualization type, templates are downloaded from the Proxmox server depending on which one they are generated on.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|5. OS Templates are loaded from the storage. Make sure the module can access its content by selecting appropriate permissions for the chosen storage.
+|}
+<!--
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|6. Due to API limitations, KVM virtualization supports only graphs concerning '' 'Bandwidth'. '' Other virtualizations support all graphs.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|7. To name the location according to your needs, while within the module, change the lang into:
+ $_LANG['node_X']='Your friendly name for node_X';
+|}
+-->
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|6. When the PAM authentication is used, it is necessary to create a client first in order to change the password correctly. Read more about it [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/User_Management#pveum_authentication_realms here].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|7. As this module supports the templates system, any changes made in the module's template files will be saved after the upgrade process.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|8. If you are using the module in the 2.3.2 version or any previous one, and would like to migrate to '''Proxmox VE V5.X''', you need to update the files on your Proxmox server to the new version from the ''' 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' ''' folder.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|9. OS Templates serve only as operating systems for the VM, while VM Templates contain complete configuration of the VM, the amount of resources included.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|10. You can use the '' {$service_assigned_ips} '' tag in your welcome email template to display automatically assigned IP addresses for the created VM (either the KVM or LXC virtualization type).<br/> Other available tags in the '' 'Client  Notifications' '' emails:
+ {$user.username}
+ {$user.password}
+ {$user.realm}
+If you wish you may add other information, like password, into the email, just refer to e.g. '' 'VPS Server Welcome Email' '' email template in your WHMCS to find appropriate merge fields.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' Remember that if the client's email address is incorrect or WHMCS is not able to correctly send it because of any reason, the module will not create the VM for that client correctly.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|11. '' 'One User Per VPS' '' option allows you to either create a new username for each new client's VM, or create only one that will be then used for every new VM owned by your client.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|12. You can use the '' 'IPSet IP Filter' '' option for firewall to prevent IP spoofing. Click [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Firewall#pve_firewall_ip_sets here] to read more about IP Sets.<br/>
+Inside the admin area, in the product details view, you can preview the current IP Sets on VM:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_68.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|13. You can enable '' 'Admin Notifications' '' on product configuration to be informed via email about certain actions. These are:
+*''Service Creation Failed'' - if there were any errors that prevented the VM from being successfully created, then the selected email template will be sent to the administrator
+*''Upgrade'' - select the email notification template you want to receive if the client requests the product upgrade.<br/>This will also block the automatic sending of an upgrade request to the Proxmox API, so the administrator can review it first.<br/>'' '''Note''' that, if chosen, the product will still be upgraded in the WHMCS itself, but the upgrade request will not be passed to the API.<br/>To finalize the upgrade, use the "Change Package" module command in your admin area.''
+*''To-Do List'' - if checked, in addition to sending any of the above notifications, it will also add them as tasks on the ''[https://docs.whmcs.com/System_Utilities#To-Do_List WHMCS To-Do List]''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_69.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|Default email templates include basic variables, but you can include more, such as:
+*'''service_customfields''' - any custom fields defined for the service, for example:
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 15px; margin-bottom: 20px; margin-top: 15px"
+| {$service_customfields.vmid}
+| {$service_customfields.node}
+|-
+| {$service_customfields.userName}
+| {$service_customfields.cipassword}
+|-
+| {$service_customfields.sshkeys}
+| {$service_customfields.baseTemplate}
+|}
+*'''client'''- client data from WHMCS:
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 15px; margin-bottom: 20px; margin-top: 15px;"
+| {$client.userid}
+| {$client.client_id}
+| {$client.id}
+|-
+| {$client.owner_user_id}
+| {$client.uuid}
+| {$client.firstname}
+|-
+| {$client.lastname}
+| {$client.fullname}
+| {$client.companyname}
+|-
+| {$client.email}
+| {$client.address1}
+| {$client.address2}
+|-
+| {$client.city}
+| {$client.fullstate}
+| {$client.state}
+|-
+| {$client.postcode}
+| {$client.countrycode}
+| {$client.country}
+|-
+| {$client.phonenumber}
+| {$client.tax_id}
+| {$client.email_preferences}
+|-
+| {$client.statecode}
+| {$client.countryname}
+| {$client.phonecc}
+|-
+| {$client.phonenumberformatted}
+| {$client.telephoneNumber}
+| {$client.billingcid}
+|-
+| {$client.notes}
+| {$client.currency}
+| {$client.defaultgateway}
+|-
+| {$client.cctype}
+| {$client.cclastfour}
+| {$client.gatewayid}
+|-
+| {$client.groupid}
+| {$client.status}
+| {$client.credit}
+|-
+| {$client.taxexempt}
+| {$client.latefeeoveride}
+| {$client.overideduenotices}
+|-
+| {$client.separateinvoices}
+| {$client.disableautocc}
+| {$client.emailoptout}
+|-
+| {$client.marketing_emails_opt_in}
+| {$client.overrideautoclose}
+| {$client.allowSingleSignOn}
+|-
+| {$client.email_verified}
+| {$client.language}
+| {$client.isOptedInToMarketingEmails}
+|-
+| {$client.tax_state}
+| {$client.tax_countrycode}
+| {$client.lastlogin}
+|-
+| {$client.customfields}
+| {$client.customfields1}
+| {$client.customfields2}
+|-
+| {$client.customfields3}
+| {$client.customfields3}
+|}
+*'''vm'''- virtual machine related data, as long as it is present:
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 15px; margin-bottom: 20px; margin-top: 15px;"
+| {$vm.digest}
+| {$vm.acpi}
+| {$vm.affinity}
+|-
+| {$vm.agent}
+| {$vm.arch}
+| {$vm.args}
+|-
+| {$vm.audio0}
+| {$vm.autostart}
+| {$vm.balloon}
+|-
+| {$vm.bios}
+| {$vm.boot}
+| {$vm.bootdisk}
+|-
+| {$vm.cdrom}
+| {$vm.cicustom}
+| {$vm.cipassword}
+|-
+| {$vm.citype}
+| {$vm.ciupgrade}
+| {$vm.ciuser}
+|-
+| {$vm.cores}
+| {$vm.cpu}
+| {$vm.cpulimit}
+|-
+| {$vm.cpuunits}
+| {$vm.description}
+| {$vm.efidisk0}
+|-
+| {$vm.freeze}
+| {$vm.hookscript}
+| {$vm.hostpci[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.hotplug}
+| {$vm.hugepages}
+| {$vm.ide[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.ipconfig[n]}
+| {$vm.ivshmem}
+| {$vm.keephugepages}
+|-
+| {$vm.keyboard}
+| {$vm.kvm}
+| {$vm.localtime}
+|-
+| {$vm.lock}
+| {$vm.machine}
+| {$vm.memory}
+|-
+| {$vm.migrate_downtime}
+| {$vm.migrate_speed}
+| {$vm.name}
+|-
+| {$vm.nameserver}
+| {$vm.net[n]}
+| {$vm.numa}
+|-
+| {$vm.numa[n]}
+| {$vm.onboot}
+| {$vm.ostype}
+|-
+| {$vm.parallel[n]}
+| {$vm.protection}
+| {$vm.reboot}
+|-
+| {$vm.rng0}
+| {$vm.sata[n]}
+| {$vm.scsi[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.scsihw}
+| {$vm.searchdomain}
+| {$vm.serial[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.shares}
+| {$vm.smbios1}
+| {$vm.smp}
+|-
+| {$vm.sockets}
+| {$vm.spice_enhancements}
+| {$vm.sshkeys}
+|-
+| {$vm.startdate}
+| {$vm.startup}
+| {$vm.tablet}
+|-
+| {$vm.tags}
+| {$vm.tdf}
+| {$vm.template}
+|-
+| {$vm.tpmstate0}
+| {$vm.unused[n]}
+| {$vm.usb[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.vcpus}
+| {$vm.vga}
+| {$vm.virtio[n]}
+|-
+| {$vm.vmgenid}
+| {$vm.vmstatestorage}
+| {$vm.watchdog}
+|-
+| {$vm.ha}
+| {$vm.status}
+| {$vm.vmid}
+|-
+| {$vm.clipboard}
+| {$vm.cpus}
+| {$vm.maxdisk}
+|-
+| {$vm.maxmem}
+| {$vm.pid}
+| {$vm.qmpstatus}
+|-
+| {$vm.running-machine}
+| {$vm.running-qemu}
+| {$vm.spice}
+|-
+| {$vm.uptime}
+|
+|
+|}
+*'''service'''- additional service data:
+{| class="wikitable" style="margin-left: 15px; margin-bottom: 20px; margin-top: 15px;"
+| {$service.id}
+| {$service.userid}
+| {$service.orderid}
+|-
+| {$service.packageid}
+| {$service.server}
+| {$service.regdate}
+|-
+| {$service.domain}
+| {$service.paymentmethod}
+| {$service.qty}
+|-
+| {$service.firstpaymentamount}
+| {$service.amount}
+| {$service.billingcycle}
+|-
+| {$service.nextduedate}
+| {$service.nextinvoicedate}
+| {$service.termination_date}
+|-
+| {$service.completed_date}
+| {$service.domainstatus}
+| {$service.username}
+|-
+| {$service.notes}
+| {$service.subscriptionid}
+| {$service.promoid}
+|-
+| {$service.promocount}
+| {$service.suspendreason}
+| {$service.overideautosuspend}
+|-
+| {$service.overidesuspenduntill}
+| {$service.dedicatedip}
+| {$service.assignedips}
+|-
+| {$service.ns1}
+| {$service.ns2}
+| {$service.diskusage}
+|-
+| {$service.disklimit}
+| {$service.bwusage}
+| {$service.bwlimit}
+|-
+| {$service.lastupdate}
+| {$service.created_at}
+| {$service.updated_at}
+|-
+| {$service.domainPunycode}
+| {$service.password}
+|
+|}
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|14. The '' 'Minimum Network Rate Limit' '' option allows you to change the previously entered '' 'Network Rate Limit' '' value to a new one if the current '' 'Bandwidth Limit' '' is already reached.<br/>Note that the '' 'Bandwidth Limit' ''  can also be used for the WHMCS overage billing calculation as described [https://docs.whmcs.com/Disk_Space_and_Bandwidth_Overage_Billing here].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_70.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|15. '' 'Default Username Prefix' '' - when filling in this field you may use the {$serviceid} parameter to avoid problems with creating usernames that already exist.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|16. You can easily import and assign any already existing VM from Proxmox to your WHMCS.<br/>
+First, you need order Proxmox VPS product to your client account  without processing the VM creation process. <br/>
+Next, in the client's '' 'Products/Services' '' management tab of your admin area, fill the '' 'VMID' '' and '' 'Node' '' custom fields with the VMID of the virtual machine you want to import from your Proxmox server  <br/>
+Afterward, change the product status to '' 'Active' '', save changes and use the '' 'Change User Role' '' module command.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|17. It is possible to display more information about your VM in Proxmox Environment.<br/> To do so, you need to provide the preferred records in the '' 'Container Notes' '' tab under the ' ''KVM or LXC Configuration' '' section. <br/>The following records can be used:
+<pre>Client: {$client_name} (ID: {$client_id})
+Email: {$client_email} Service ID: {$service_id}
+Product: {$product_name} (ID: {$product_id})
+Hostname: {$service_domain}
+Main IP: {$service_dedicated_ip} {if $service_assigned_ips}
+IP Address Allocation: {$service_assigned_ips} {/if}</pre>
+You may also use markdown to modify the container notes, for example:
+<pre>Client: {$client_name} (ID: {$client_id})\
+Email: {$client_email}\
+Service ID: {$service_id}\
+Hostname: {$service_domain}\
+Main IP: {$service_dedicated_ip} {if $service_assigned_ips} </pre>
+The above notes will be displayed with every item starting in a new line.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|18. When the interface names on the VM are '''Net\d+''', you need to choose '''Eth\d+''' in the '' 'Firewall' '' section of the product configuration.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|19. If you want your clients to provide their own hostname, you need to add the following custom field in the '' 'Custom Fields' '' tab of the product configuration. <br/>
+<pre> proxmoxHostname|Hostname </pre>
+|}
+<div id="create-vm"></div>
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''20. Create Linux VM:'''<br/>
+* Create a VM template according to descriptions [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Cloud-Init_Support#_preparing_cloud_init_templates here]<br/>
+* Move to ''Module Settings → Virtual Machine Configuration → OS Template'', select the previously created template (e.g. Ubuntu)<br/>
+* In ''Module Settings → Cloud-Init:'' '''Cloud-Init: On''', '''Service Username: On''', '''Service Password: On'''<br/>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_99.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|
+* Place a new order, wait until all tasks in ''Proxmox Addon → Tasks'' have '' 'finished' '' status.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''21. Create Windows VM:'''<br/>
+* Create a new virtual machine using an ISO image in Proxmox panel<br/>
+* Install ''Guest Agent'' on the windows system, read more [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Qemu-guest-agent#Windows here]<br/>
+* Convert the created machine into a KVM template<br/>
+* Move to the product ''Module Settings → Guest Agent'' and switch options as below:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_100.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|
+* ''Module Settings → Virtual Machine Configuration:'' select the previously created Windows template under ''OS Template'' <br/>
+* Place a new order, wait until all tasks in ''Proxmox Addon → Tasks'' have '' 'finished' '' status.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|22. Configuring '' 'Default User' '' per template. Move to '' 'Proxmox Addon' → 'Servers' → 'Server Details' → 'Templates' → 'Create/Edit Template'.''<br/>
+You may assign a default user to a single template, that user will be automatically assigned to the newly created VM.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|23. Configurable option field: '' 'Storage Disc Space' '' - this option allows to define the type and space on disc via a configurable option when placing an order.<br/> It also allows to extend the space as well as change the disc type. This CO overwrites the ordinary '' 'Disc Space' '' field available in the product configuration section.<br/>
+'''''Important:''' To migrate the disc, you must previously 'Stop' your VM.''<br/>
+'''''Note:''' Values provided in configurable option must be integers.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|24. Usage of '''VLAN Tags''':<br/>
+VLAN Tags Range Minimum and Maximum Numbers simply play the role of network separation measures. The minimum and maximum numbers cause the module to select the next free VLAN Tag from this range for each virtual machine it creates.<br/> VLAN Tag is actually a drop-down list, and to select anything in this section, firstly, it is necessary to configure appropriate IP addresses in your ''Proxmox addon → IP Management'' section:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_30_3.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_30_4.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|25. '''SDN Support''':<br/>
+The module supports SDN private network type. It is possible to create virtual networks (vnets) at datacenter level thanks to the Software Defined Network (SDN).<br/> To learn all the details on SDN in proxmox, please navigate to the official proxmox [https://pve.proxmox.com/pve-docs/chapter-pvesdn.html documentation]. <br/>
+In the module, the whole configuration of SDN is located in '' 'Module Settings' → 'Private Network' '' section. There you will find dedicated options, these are:
+*Private Network Type
+*SDN Zone
+*SDN TAG Range Minimum Number
+*SDN TAG Range Maximum Number
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PXC2_32.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|26. The "fetchBackupsForArchive" parameter in the "global_options.yml" file allows skipping the backups from being loaded into the "Archive" list in the product configuration.
+By default the parameter is set to '' 'true' '' and backups are loaded. You may change it manually to '' 'false' '' and no backups will be loaded in the '' 'Archive' '' dropdown list as on the screens below:
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_33_0.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX2_33_1.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|27. '''OS Templates and ISO Images' names - translate the names of available templates and images easily.'''<br/> Add extra lines into the module language file ''(e.g. /yourWHMCS/modules/servers/proxmoxVPS/langs/english.php)'' with your desired translations to customize their names.<br/>
+Follow the bellow pattern to add new lines:
+ $_LANG['template']['ISO_name'] = 'My ISO Name';
+For example:
+ $_LANG['template']['Ubuntu'] = 'Ubuntu - preferred';
+ $_LANG['template']['Debian Live 9.4.0 Amd64 Cinnamon'] = 'Aktuelles Debian';
+Please note that '''['ISO_name']''' must be replaced with the full template or image name that you are going to change.<br/> As a result, the OS templates and ISO images names will be displayed in the language of your choice or with your custom name.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|28. If you want to use the IP Address, CIDR and Gateway allocated from the IP Management section of the Proxmox Addon module instead of hard coding them, use the following parameter:
+  {$ipv4Addresses[0].gateway}
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|29. Select the storage type already while placing the order.<br/>
+Create the "Storage Disk Space" configurable option with storage size and name to allow clients to set "Storage Disk Space" during the order. It will be used instead of the provided "Disk Space" value.<br/>
+For VE VPS '''KVM''' and '''LXC''':
+* Resource Usage:
+** Available resources
+** Disc size
+** Storage type
+Exceptions:
+* if the "Linked Clone" option is selected in "Clone Mode" of the KVM configuration, the storage disk space will not work. ''(In the case of a linked template the KVM must have the same storage as the machine's main disk)''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 15px 15px;"|30. '''Private Network management'''<br/>
+The module allows to create private network skipping the IP Management and firewall settings. Disable the below options if you do not aim to assign the IP address to the private network device.
+*'' 'Assign IP Address Automatically' '' - option toggled by default; the IP Address is automatically assigned to a private network device
+*'' 'Firewall on Private Network' '' - option toggled by default; the firewall is enabled on a private network device
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_22_9.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|31. '''How to Test Cloud Init in Proxmox Panel'''<br/>
+If a Linux machine does not have a password or network configured, but the data is correctly sent to the Proxmox panel, check if Cloud Init is properly configured on the template.<br/>
+To test this, set the password and user in the Proxmox panel’s Cloud Init section and clone the template. This will confirm if the password is applied correctly in the system.
+|}
+<!--
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 15px;"|21. You can allow your clients to provide their own password to the VM when '' 'Cloud-init' '' is used. <br/> Simply, add this custom field in the '' 'Custom Fields' '' tab of the product configuration and remember to tick the '' 'Show on Order Form' '' option. <br/>
+<pre> cipassword|Password </pre>
+|}-->
+=Update Instructions=
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|Essential guidance through the process of updating the module is offered '''[https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/How_To_Update_WHMCS_Module here]'''.<br/>
+''Please note that each time you update the module, you have to also update the files on the Proxmox server described in the step 4 of the installation guide.''
+<br/>
+''' Important:''' After upgrading the module to the newest version please '''first''' enter to the '''Proxmox addon''' in your WHMCS before setting up the product or opening it from admin or client area!<br/> Otherwise, when you try to open the product's module settings, you may get '' SQLSTATE" "Base table or view not found" '' errors.<br/>
+Please also note that since 2.7.0 module version the commands for the crons execution have slighty changed - although the old ones should still work, we recommend that you update their entries.
+|}
+=Upgrade Guide=
+{|
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|Seeking a solution that offers greater flexibility, customization tailored to your precise needs, and unrestricted availability?<br/> There is an option that not only proves to be cost-effective in the long run but also includes prioritized support services, making it a truly valuable investment.<br/>
+Opt for the [https://www.modulesgarden.com/products/whmcs/proxmox-ve-vps#open-source-version Open Source version] of your Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module to unlock these benefits.<br/> Simply click on either the '''Get Source Code''' or '''Upgrade To Lifetime''' button found on the product's page in our client area to complete the one-step upgrade process, with a '''dedicated discount''' already applied.<br/>
+Follow a [https://www.docs.modulesgarden.com/How_To_Upgrade_WHMCS_Module comprehensive guide] covering the transition process, the advantages it brings, and step-by-step instructions on what to do next after the order has been successfully finalized.
 |}
 =Common Problems=
 {|
-|style="padding: 10px 0px 30px 15px;"|1. When you have problems with connection, check whether your SELinux or firewall is not blocking ports.
+|style="padding: 10px 0px 10px 15px;"|'''1. When you have problems with connection, check whether your SELinux or firewall does not block ports.'''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|2. Error 'Could not create PVE2_API object' during connecting via the noVNC console.<br />
+'''Reason:''' The user account does not have permission to access the noVNC console.<br />
+'''Solution:''' Proceed to the product's 'Module Settings' tab and check whether the selected user's permission grants access to the noVNC console.<br />
+Afterward, proceed to the client's hosting and run '' 'Change User Role' '' on it.<br/>
+To change the user role for all clients, please use the '' 'Cron job users synchronization (run only once)' '' cron command.<br/> You will find it in the '' 'Proxmox Addon' → 'General Settings'.''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|3. Error 'This connection is untrusted' during connecting via the noVNC console.<br />
+'''Reason:''' Your certificate is not valid.<br />
+'''Quick Solution:''' Your client needs to add the Proxmox address to the certificate exception list.<br />
+'''Best Solution:''' Configure a valid certificate.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|4. The blank page during connecting via noVNC console, '' '501 Error' '' visible in the proxmox panel. <br />
+'''Reason:''' You have not uploaded the additional files on the Proxmox server.<br />
+'''Solution:'''  Open 'UploadOnProxmoxServer' and upload content of the proper version on all Proxmox servers into the '/' path.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|5. Error 'Change password failed: user 'xxx' does not exist'<br/>
+'''Reason:''' You have not created a client yet.<br />
+'''Solution:''' When the PAM authentication is used, it is necessary to create a client first in order to change the password correctly. Read more about it [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/User_Management#pveum_authentication_realms here].
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|6. Error 'Function "ssh2_connect" does not exist. Please Install SSH2 PECL before you start using the script.'<br/>
+'''Reason:''' You have not updated the php.ini file.<br />
+'''Solution:''' After SSH2 PECL installation, make sure that you have updated the php.ini files for CLI and webserver.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|7. Once you have updated your Proxmox VPS For WHMCS to Proxmox VPS For WHMCS V2.0.0, it is always required to save your product configuration<br/> in the module settings again.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|8. The current disk usage for the KVM virtualization type is not properly displayed.<br/>This is due to API limitations that lead to returning the incorrect value, which is always set to '' '0' ''.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|9. If you want to use Cloud-Init on Debian, we recommend using the Cloud-Init's version 18.2 or later to avoid assorted problems occurring in previous versions.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|10. Error: "Only root can set 'serial0' config".<br />
+'''Solution:''' Turn off the Xterms.js console in the product configuration.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|11. Error "Parameter verification failed. ([maxfiles] - Only root may set this option.)"<br/>
+'''Reason:''' The user is other than "root" or the server authentication is set to Proxmox VE.<br />
+'''Solution:''' In the server configuration, set the root details, and select PAM as the authentication type.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 5px 15px;"|12. Error "Node for IP Address 10.10.10.10 not found"<br/>
+'''Reason:''' An interface with the IP Address 10.10.10.10 cannot be found.<br/>
+'''Solution:'''  You need to provide your private IP Address node in the '' 'Assigned IP Addresses' '' field in the server configuration in your WHMCS.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|13. Please remember that the disk size cannot be downgraded. Such a possibility is '''not''' supported.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|14. Error: "Cannot clone to non-shared storage 'local"
+'''Reason:''' Option '' 'Search For Templates On All Nodes' '' is enabled in the product configuration under KVM configuration. <br/>
+'''Solution:''' Keep the above option disabled as shown on the screen. <br/>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 20px 25px;"|[[File:PX3_101.png]]
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|
+Remember that cloning from node "A" to node "B" does not work on the local storage.<br/> We do recommend using [https://pve.proxmox.com/wiki/Storage "Shared Storage"] or creating the machine on the same node on which the KVM template is located. <br/>
+It is important  to keep every template named the same on every node, otherwise cloning will not work either, eg.:<br/>
+'''''node1:''' Ubuntu, CentOS, Debian''<br/>'''''node2:''' Ubuntu, CentOS, Debian''  <br/>
+<!--If the '' 'Search For Templates On All Nodes'' ' option is enabled, the module searches for KVM templates from all nodes and lists them during reinstallation. <br/>If the end-user chooses a template that is on a node other than his machine, then he will get an error: ''' '' 'Cannot clone to non-shared storage 'local' '' ''' <br/>
+If the templates are set to local storage, their cloning to another node is impossible. The module itself will not detect whether a given template is local or shared. <br/>If the option is off, then the module looks for templates only on the node on which the machine is. -->
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|15. Error: "Nameserver '%' cannot be resolved"<br/>
+'''Reason:'''  The nameserver IP must be provided for the virtual machine of LXC configuration type.<br/> By default, the module uses the content provided by the client during order, eg. ns1, then WHMCS completes the nameserver with a domain. <br/>If the nameserver field is left empty or the client orders a new domain, the system is not able to process the data correctly and create a full address. <br/>
+'''Solution:''' Enable the '' 'Use Server Nameservers' '' option in the product's configuration or manually correct the nameserver per the order. <br/>
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|16. Error: "SQLSTATE[42S02]: Base table or view not found: Table 'ProxmoxAddon_ServerUsage' doesn't exist"<br/>
+'''Reason:''' The ''ProxmoxAddon_ServerUsage'' table has not been created properly because the ''tblservers'' table is on a different engine than "InnoDB"<br/>
+'''Solution:''' Change the engine to "InnoDB", deactivate the proxmox addon and then activate it again. The missing table will be created.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|17. The ''Move Product/Service'' action is not supported by the Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS module.<br/> This is due to WHMCS limitations, and the fact that there are no hooks that would allow to catch such an event.
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|18. Error: "([boot] - invalid format - format error boot.order: invalid format - invalid boot device 'c')"<br/>
+Solution: Edit the boot order in any of the templates to ensure the boot order is saved in a new format ''(after the change you may go back to the previous order)''
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 10px 15px;"|19. In case you encounter any problems with the '' 'Guest Agent','' please  first ensure that the service is active in the machine's operating system. <br/>
+You may use the following command in PowerShell to check the status:
+  Get-Service QEMU-GA
+To restart the service (stop and start again) use the following command:
+  Restart-Service QEMU-GA
+|}
+{|
+|style="padding: 0px 0px 30px 15px;"|20. Error: "SQLSTATE[HY000] [2002] php_network_getaddresses: getaddrinfo for proxydb failed: Temporary failure in name resolution"<br/>
+Solution: Make sure there are no old volumes or duplicate .env files present.''
 |}

Personal tools

Namespaces

Variants

Views

Actions

Search

Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS

Latest revision as of 13:25, 11 October 2024

Contents

[edit] About Proxmox VE VPS For WHMCS

[edit] Installation and Configuration

[edit] Installation

[edit] Activation of Proxmox Addon

[edit] Configuration of Server

[edit] Configuration of Product

[edit] KVM Virtualization Type

[edit] LXC Virtualization Type

[edit] Finalizing The Configuration

[edit] Configuration of Addon

[edit] Proxy Installation For Console Connection

[edit] Cloud-Init (KVM)

[edit] Custom Configuration In Addon

[edit] Cloud-Init Scripts

[edit] Server Details

[edit] Configuration Of Product

[edit] Configuration Of Proxmox Server

[edit] Additional Storage Configuration

[edit] Management

[edit] Admin Area

[edit] Management of Addon

[edit] Servers Management

[edit] Servers List

[edit] VMs

[edit] Clusters

[edit] VM Cleaner

[edit] Templates

[edit] Server Settings

[edit] Node Groups

[edit] Services List

[edit] Recovery VM Lists

[edit] Task History

[edit] IP Management

[edit] IP Logs

[edit] IP Manager Integration

[edit] General Settings

[edit] Load Balancer

[edit] Node Prioritization Method

[edit] Global Limitations

[edit] Task Settings

[edit] Admin Area Features

[edit] Scheduled Backups Templates

[edit] Firewall Templates

[edit] Operating Systems Groups

[edit] Tasks

[edit] Widget

[edit] Client Area

[edit] Client Area - VM Management

[edit] noVNC Console

[edit] SPICE Console

[edit] Xterm.js Console

[edit] Client Area - Additional Tools

[edit] Backups

[edit] Backup Collection

[edit] Backup Jobs

[edit] Backup Schedules

[edit] Disks (KVM only)

[edit] Firewall

[edit] Firewall Options

[edit] Graphs

[edit] Network

[edit] Reinstallation

[edit] Resource Notifications

[edit] Snapshots

[edit] Task History

[edit] VM Power Tasks

[edit] Configurable Options

[edit] List of Configurable Options

[edit] Integration with Products Reseller For WHMCS

[edit] Management of Billing

[edit] Management of Existing Accounts